JP6500176B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a variable winning device.

  Conventionally, a variable winning device that can be converted into a first state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player and a second state (opened state) advantageous to the player in the game area, and a start winning opening capable of winning the gaming ball A start game is performed to convert the variable winning device to a second state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) based on the game ball winning to the start winning opening, and the variable winning device as a result of the start game. When a game ball that has won a prize has flowed into a special prize area inside, a big hit state is generated, and the fluctuation winning device is converted to the second state based on a prescribed rule (18 operations or 10 wins) There is known a gaming machine which makes it possible to obtain a large number of winnings.

In such a gaming machine, a guidance device for guiding a winning gaming ball to easily flow into the special winning area is provided in the inside (winning space) of the variable winning apparatus, and the winning prize space of the variable winning apparatus is reached. If the gaming ball is guided by the guidance device in a timely manner, it will flow into the special winning area with high probability.
The above-mentioned induction device is to be operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, and starts to operate after a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball has won the start winning hole, and may operate for a predetermined time. It is common. Therefore, when there is a game ball that has won the variable winning device at the operation timing of the guiding device, it will flow into the special winning area with high probability.

JP 2000-334103 A

However, since the conventional induction device is operated by the action of the electric drive source as described above, and the timing is also controlled at a constant, the probability that the gaming ball flows into the special winning area is the second state It is often determined by which timing in the second state the winnings are made with respect to the variable winning device that has been converted to a, and it is difficult to realize a highly interesting inflow mode.
That is, in such a gaming machine, the game ball, which originally flows irregularly in the winning space, flows to the special winning area after the intention, and whether or not to win the special winning area The purpose is to enjoy whether the game balls that flowed down finally win a special winning area or the flowing game balls flowed into a special winning area, etc. It is difficult to realize.

Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, as described above, since the induction device operated by the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid is controlled at a constant timing, the probability that the game ball flows into the special winning area It is conceivable to play a game by a method such as so-called hitting, aiming and hitting a game ball only at timing when becomes high.
When a game is played by such a method, the operating rate of the gaming machine is lowered and the profit of the gaming shop is lowered.

  Therefore, the present invention is, in a gaming machine provided with a variable winning device, to improve the interest when the game ball flows down in the winning space of the variable winning device and to prevent the strike-off.

The invention according to claim 1 has a starting winning opening,
And a variable winning device;
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The fluctuation winning device is provided with a guidance device for repeating the predetermined operation as one cycle and guiding the game balls winning the fluctuation winning device so as to easily flow into the special winning area,
When the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the open control means which operates the fluctuation winning a prize device with either of plural opening patterns which are based on the stop design of the special figure fluctuation display game When,
Among the plurality of fluctuation times set in advance as the operation time for the induction device to operate from the operation initial stop position as the reference position to any one of the plurality of predetermined operation positions, the special figure fluctuation Variation time selection means for selecting a variation time of the display game;
And a special figure variation control means for controlling the special figure variation display game ,
The special figure fluctuation control means
The control of the special view fluctuation display game is performed by any of a plurality of fluctuation modes including a normal fluctuation and a long fluctuation causing a fluctuation longer than the normal fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation is required for one cycle. Set based on time,
The long variation suggests that the stop pattern may be displayed in which the opening pattern of the variable winning device is more advantageous to the player than the normal opening pattern.
The selection rates of the plurality of fluctuation times are set so that all of the plurality of predetermined operation positions occur substantially equally .

  According to the present invention, in the gaming machine provided with the variable winning device, it is possible to improve the interest when the gaming ball flows down the winning space of the variable winning device and to prevent the strike-off.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a change winning a prize device. It is a front view in a state where the fluctuation winning device is slightly inclined to the front side. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 1st character object apparatus of a variable winning a prize apparatus. It is a figure explaining the operation function of a change winning a prize device. It is a perspective view which shows the detail of the heaven character apparatus of a variable winning prize apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of the round determination role thing of the board production apparatus in a variable winning a prize apparatus. It is a figure which shows a mode that the board production apparatus in a fluctuation prize apparatus was decomposed | disassembled. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows input processing. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payment command transmission processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a random number update process 1; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows gaming machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows game stop error processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 starting mouth switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 starting mouth switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth count update processing. It is a flowchart which shows a specific area | region switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure power on operation process. It is a flow chart which shows a special figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing and special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process in special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart which shows processing under special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart which shows small hit operation setting transfer processing. It is a timing chart of a small hit operation. It is a flow chart which shows small hit residual ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a timing chart of big hit operation. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows design change control processing. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing and 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows stopper solenoid control processing. It is a flowchart which shows segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows motor control processing. It is a flow chart which shows motor operation edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows motor operation edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a character feature presentation command edit process. It is a flowchart which shows abnormal discharge monitoring processing. 34 is a flowchart showing a game stop error status update process. It is a flowchart which shows a fraud monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows emission control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a pulse signal edit process. It is a timing chart of operation of main prize ball signal transmission. It is a timing chart explaining operation of the 1st thing device in a change winning a prize device. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting of the fluctuation pattern distribution in a fluctuation winning combination apparatus.

Hereinafter, a form example at the time of applying to a pachinko machine as Example 1 of the present invention is explained with reference to drawings.
Here, a pachinko machine as a suitable example of a game machine according to the present invention, in particular, a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather thing will be sequentially described from FIG.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 1 (game machine) according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by being pivotally supported by the hinge 3 on the machine frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the machine frame 2 And a front frame 4 which can be freely opened and closed. A game board 30 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the front upper side so as to be openable and closable. In addition, a game area 32 described later of the game board 30 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted, and a reference numeral is omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is called by the name of a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes called by the name of a front frame, but in the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are explained.
Below the glass frame 5, an operation panel 6 is provided.
Usually, a CR unit (card-type ball rental control unit) as a gaming medium lending device may be provided side by side with the pachinko machine 1, but illustration is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer), and the substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by the guide rails 31 to play the game area 32 is formed. The game area 32 is an area for performing out or safe determination (determination as to whether or not a prize has been made) while dropping the thrown game ball from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of gaming balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (i.e., discharged as a winning ball).
In addition, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at an edge of the opening and closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before being discharged as a winning ball or a rental ball.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 capable of transferring the gaming ball of the upper plate 7 by the operation of the player, and a firing operation handle 11 for performing a firing operation of the gaming ball.
In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated internally on the left and right of the glass frame 5 for decoration or effect, and notification at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp or LED Frame decoration device 12 (placed on the left and right of the frame as shown in FIG. 1) for emitting light for lighting (flickering)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 13a for emitting an 13b is provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 13 c is provided at the lower part of the front frame 4. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal contents are notified by voice from the speakers (upper speakers) 13a and 12b and the speaker (lower speaker) 13c. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 5.

Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 7, a presentation button 15 incorporating a presentation button switch 15a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15, a touch panel 16 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 16 is provided integrally with the effect button 15, but the touch panel 16 may be separate from the effect button 15. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 15, The touch panel 16 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 15, the ball lending button 17 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, the discharge operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine A button 18, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the game ball is supplied from the upper plate 7 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30 by the player moving the launch operation handle 11 to rotate the launch operation handle 11. Fire towards. In addition, by the player operating the effect button 15 or the touch panel 16, in the round lottery effect in the board effect device 46 (see FIG. 2, FIG. 11), it is possible to perform effects such as intervention by the player's operation. .

B. Front Structure of the Game Board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 31 denotes a guide rail of the game board 30, and as described above, the game area 32 is formed by the substantially circular area on the front of the game board 30 being surrounded by the guide rails 31. It is done.
At the lower part of the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 of the game board 30, a pair of first start winning openings 33a and 33b (first start openings) are provided separately from each other in the left and right direction. A second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening) is provided in the middle between the openings 33a and 33b.
The pair of first start winning openings 33a and 33b (first start openings) are also referred to as a left start opening and a right start opening, respectively. The second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is also referred to as a middle start opening.
The first starting winning opening 33a, 33b is provided with a left starting opening switch 105 and a right starting opening switch 106 (shown in FIG. 10) for detecting gaming balls that have won in the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b. It is done. Further, the second starting winning opening 34 is provided with a middle starting opening switch 107 (shown in FIG. 10) for detecting the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 34. Further, at the center of the game area 32, a variable winning device 35 is provided as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the game area 32, although not shown, a hitting direction changing member called a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning opening 36a, 36b, an out hole 37, etc. are provided. There is. Among these, each general winning opening 36a, 36b, there is a winning opening switch 104 (there are 1 to n depending on the number of the general winning opening) for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the general winning opening 36a, 36b ( 10) is disposed.

  The variable winning device 35 is attached to a mounting opening (not shown) formed on the gaming board 30 from the front side of the gaming board 30, and a winning space opened on the front side and extending rearward of the gaming board 30. It has a winning space forming member 42 which forms 41. Further, the front side of the fluctuation winning device 35 is in a state of protruding to the vicinity of the glass plate covering the front surface of the game board 30, and in the fluctuation winning device 35 except when movable members 43a and 43b described later are opened. The game ball is designed not to enter.

Here, FIG. 2 shows the entire configuration of the game board 30 including the variable winning device 35, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing the variable winning device 35 alone. Further, FIG. 4 is a view showing the fluctuation winning device 35 alone while the whole fluctuation winning device 35 is slightly inclined to the front side to easily understand the state of the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 described later. is there.
In the following description, although it demonstrates using the said FIG. 2 thru | or FIG. 4, first, as shown in FIG. And functions as a decoration device at the upper part of the variable winning device 35, and prevents the game ball flowing down from above the variable winning device 35 from entering the winning space 41, and It is designed to guide in the direction.
On the other hand, on the lower side of the variable winning device 35, a board effect device 46 and an information display 45 are provided as a round determining combination, the details of which will be described later.
For convenience of explanation, to explain the information display 45 first, the information display 45 displays information matched to the gaming state, and can display a plurality of identification information (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) It has become. This information display 45 is a demonstration screen display, a display when the game ball is in the start winning hole 33a, 33b, 34, a display when the game ball is in the special winning area 69 described later (when a special game occurs) The display regarding various game states, such as the display in the special game state, is made.
In addition, the information display 45 is not controlled by the below-mentioned game control apparatus 100 (FIG. 10), but as shown in FIG. 11, it is the structure controlled by the effect control apparatus 300. FIG. Further, the board effect device 46 is also controlled by the effect control device 300 as described later.

The information display 45 has a configuration in which two seven-segment LEDs are arranged, and displays the various game states by combining the respective LEDs.
The various game states performed when the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b (first starting opening) by two 7-segment LEDs, that is, the gaming ball wins in the starting winning openings 33a, 33b, 34 The display when the game was played, the display when the game ball is in the special winning area 69 (when special game is generated), the display in the special game state or the game ball is paid in the second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening) If the game ball is in the special winning area 69 (when special game occurs), the display during the special game state Etc.
In addition, with regard to the hold, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start port), a special figure hold (special view 2 hold) is performed only for one, but the game ball is When winning in the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b (first starting opening), the holding of the special drawing (without holding of the special drawing 1) is not performed. Therefore, only the special figure 2 is displayed, and the display of the special figure is also limited to one.

In the first embodiment, the information display 45 is provided with an LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the information display 45 may have a display such as a liquid crystal, an EL, or a CRT.
When the information display 45 is configured not to use LEDs but displays such as liquid crystal, EL, CRT, etc., for example, if the liquid crystal display device is configured to be installed, the installation place is as shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display device may be installed not only at the current location shown in 2, but at a location where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 face each other (a location indicated by the arrow of the winning space 41). .
By doing so, it is possible to concentrate on the game, which is convenient, since it is possible for the player to look at the height of the line of sight and to look from the front. Further, compared to the case where the information display 45 is configured by the LED, the liquid crystal display device can enjoy a more powerful effect game.

  Further, on the lower right side of the game board 30, a collective display unit 50 is provided outside the guide rail 31, and the collective display unit 50 arranges two LEDs of 7 segments and arranges a plurality of small dot LEDs. It is configured. The collective display unit 50 displays a so-called special view (this special view), and further displays a start display of the special view (this special view) as a start memory hold (sometimes referred to as a special view hold display) or displays the gaming state For example, it is constituted by a plurality of displays (for example, a display consisting of one small lamp, or a display of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers etc. as this special drawing) using LED as a light source . For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, those displaying Special Drawing 1 are arranged as Special Drawing 1 displays, those displaying Special Drawing 2 are arranged as Special Drawing 2 displays.

Next, in FIGS. 2 to 4, the first character device 51 (guide device) is provided below the winning space 41 on the lower side of the upper structural member 44. The first character device 51 is also called a central bridge and is formed in a seesaw structure.
When the left and right movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the gaming ball flows into the winning space 41. The ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 is first rocked to the left and right like a seesaw as the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure will be described in detail later. As described later, it is divided into right and left by the bridge main body 80) of the first character object device 51, and flows into any of the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 described later. In addition, there is a possibility of a big hit only when it goes to the heaven inflow space 62 on the right.

  The movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a pivot center at the lower end thereof, and are controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 202 It can be turned to the left and right by the drive (shown in FIG. 10). When the movable members 43a and 43b stand substantially vertically, the movable members 43a and 43b close the winning space 41, and the gaming ball can not win the variable winning device 35. That is, this state is a disadvantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, in a state where the left and right movable members 43a and 43b are respectively pivoted from the lower end to move away from the variable winning device 35, the movable members 43a and 43b open in a reverse "C" shape. As a result, the winning space 41 is opened, and the variable winning device 35 can receive a prize. That is, this state is an advantageous second state for the player. In addition, when it is neither a starting game state nor a special game state (in the case of the normal game state and the special game standby state), the movable members 43a and 43b are kept in the closed state (first state).

This movable member 43a, 43b is a special game 1 or 2 in the start game based on the establishment of the start condition (here, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning hole 33a, 33b or the second start winning hole 34). Changes for a predetermined time, and is then converted to the second state in a predetermined manner by driving the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 202 (shown in FIG. 10), respectively (so-called small hit operation, The details will be described later), and an opportunity for winning the variable winning device 35 is obtained. Here, the special view 1 and the special view 2 refer to the special view displayed by the LED of the collective display device 50.
That is, based on the game ball which has won the first start winning opening 33a, 33b is detected by the left start port switch 105, the right start port switch 106, the special figure 1 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the result of the stop symbol One opening or twice opening is performed based on an aspect. Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuates for a predetermined time based on the fact that the game ball which has won in the second start winning opening 34 is detected in the middle starting opening switch 107, and opens twice in the result mode of all stop symbols. I do.
In the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state), and the opening operation of the predetermined mode in which the closing operation is performed again after the predetermined time elapses (here 0.5 seconds). The operation is supposed to be performed once. In the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the closing operation of the predetermined mode (here, the opening operation of 0.8 seconds) for the predetermined time (here, 0.8 seconds). It is supposed to be done twice with.

Here, the number of times of opening is not limited to the above contents, and when the first start winning opening 33a, 33b is won, it may be opened only once, or may be performed three or more times. The same applies to the case of winning in the second start winning opening 34, and the case of winning in the second starting winning opening 34 is not limited to only opening twice, but may perform opening operation three or more times with a predetermined probability. Good.
The gaming ball having flowed into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 passes either the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104 (see FIG. 11) and flows into the bridge main body 80.
Specifically, the left large winning opening switch 103 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure. Although the left large winning opening switch 103 can not be directly shown in FIG. 2 because it is installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35, the left large winning opening switch 103 is indicated by the tip of the arrow as the installation location It is installed in the internal space of the nearby fluctuation winning device 35. This is similar to FIGS. 2 to 4.

Further, the right large winning opening switch 104 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects the game balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure. There is. Similarly, the right large winning opening switch 104 can not be directly shown in FIG. 2 because it is installed in the internal space of the variable winning device 35, but as the installation location of the right large winning opening switch 104, It is installed in the internal space of the fluctuation winning device 35 in the vicinity indicated by the tip. This is similar to FIGS. 2 to 4.
The left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 are provided because the variable winning device 35 needs a detection function to determine that the gaming ball has won, so the left large winning opening switch 103 and The right big winning opening switch 104 is arranged.
In addition, as described later, a special area switch 111 for detecting a game ball which has passed the special winning area 69 is disposed inside the variable winning device 35, but the special winning area 69 detects a V winning. It is an area to do, not a winning opening where you can get a winning ball. Similarly, as described later, the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (see FIG. 7) for detecting gaming balls having passed through the remaining ball discharge area 70 is disposed in the inside of the variable winning device 35, but The discharge area 70 is an area for detecting a ball that has missed the V winning, and is not a winning opening for receiving a winning ball. The right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 is a switch for detecting that the ball has come out of the fluctuation winning device 35.

Further, the left residual ball outlet switch 112 (see FIG. 11) is disposed inside the fluctuation winning device 35, and the left residual ball outlet switch 112 flows into the hell inflow space 63 in the fluctuation winning device 35. , And has a function of detecting whether or not the sphere which has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 remains.
Although the left residual ball outlet switch 112 can not be directly shown in FIG. 2 because it is installed in the below-mentioned hell inflow space 63 (see FIG. 7) of the inside of the variable winning device 35, the left As an installation location of the remaining ball discharge port switch 112, it is installed in the internal space of the fluctuation winning device 35 in the vicinity indicated by the tip of the arrow. This is similar to FIGS. 2 to 4. On the other hand, the right residual ball outlet switch 113 installed inside the variable winning device 35 is directly shown in FIG.

The first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure disposed below the winning space 41 has a pigeon member 52, a bat member 53 and a bridge main body 80 which will be described in detail later, and the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure is As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the bridge main body 80 is configured to be swingable like a seesaw left and right, with the substantial center of the bridge main body 80 as a fulcrum. Then, when the gaming ball that has flowed into the winning space 41 comes into contact with the bridge main body 80 of the first character object device 51 of the seesaw structure at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation, The sphere is designed to flow into any of the left and right inflow spaces (heaven inflow space 62, hell inflow space 63).
Here, when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1, the right inflow space is referred to as a heaven inflow space 62 (also referred to as a heaven zone), and the left inflow space is referred to as a hell inflow space 63 (also referred to as a hell zone).
The pigeon member 52 disposed in the first character object device 51 of the seesaw structure has a function to prevent the game ball in contact with the bridge main body 80 from flowing to the heaven inflow space 62 side, while the seesaw structure The bat member 53 disposed in the first character object device 51 has a function to prevent the game ball in contact with the bridge main body 80 from flowing to the side of the hell inflow space 63. As a result, while the game ball in contact with the bridge main body 80 is pounding by the functions of the pigeon member 52 and the bat member 53, the game ball flows into either the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63. You can enjoy
However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the possibility of a big hit is only when the gaming ball advances to the right heavenly inflow space 62, so in the starting game based on the establishment of the starting condition, the gaming ball is The pigeon member 52 may not be activated to prevent the flow of the air into the heavenly inflow space 62 side. With such a configuration, the possibility of a big hit can be enhanced, and the player's willingness to play can be further enhanced.

On the right side of the fluctuation winning device 35, there is arranged an angel member 64 with a decoration imitating an angel corresponding to the heaven inflow space 62, and a pattern described as "HEAVEN" fluctuates below it. The winning device 35 is provided.
On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning device 35, there is arranged a devil member 65 having a decoration imitating a devil corresponding to the hell inflow space 63, and a pattern described as "HELL" below it. Is applied to the variable winning device 35.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a heavenly prize device 66 is provided in the heaven inflow space 62 disposed in the right side portion of the variable winning device 35. The heaven character apparatus 66 is provided with a heaven rotation body 67, and the heaven rotation body 67 is formed with a plurality of V winning concave portions 68a and 68b. Then, when the ball flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 is supported by being fitted into any of the V winning ball recessed portions 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning area 69 (see FIG. 7) and the lottery of the big hit starts It is supposed to be
As described above, the specific area switch 111 (see FIG. 7) for detecting the gaming ball having passed the special winning area 69 is disposed in the inside of the variable winning device 35, and the special winning area 69 is a gaming ball. When the specific area switch 111 detects the passage, a lottery for a big hit is performed as a V prize. However, the specific area switch 111 is for detecting the V winning by the game ball passing the special winning area 69, and does not become a winning that can receive a winning ball, and whether or not to start the lottery of the big hit To detect the
And, in the jackpot lottery, all the lottery is a big hit of 16 rounds, but not all big hit can get the same prize balls, for example a big hit for which 16 balls of prize balls can be won, 7 rounds worth It is a lottery in which one of the big hit that can be won by the winning ball and the big hit that can be obtained by the winning ball equivalent to three rounds is determined. Hereinafter, these are referred to as "16R big hit", "per 7R" and "per 3R".
Also, in a pachinko machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather thing (including the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment), since the winning of the special winning area 69 in the starting game is counted as one round, the actual big hit (special gaming state) The number of rounds decreases by one round. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the result of subtracting one round from the sixteenth round in relation to the ball, all 15 rounds of round games will be played.

On the other hand, if the ball flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit in any of the V prize recesses 68a and 68b, the ball does not fall into the special winning area 69, passes through the remaining ball discharging area 70, and fluctuates. It is discharged from the winning device 35.
In addition, below the first role apparatus 51 on the lower side of the game board 30, a board effect device 46 is provided as described above. When the starting condition is satisfied and the game ball falls into the special winning area 69 of the variable winning device 35, the board effect device 46 performs an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit, "16R big hit", "per 7R", " One of the three modes "per 3R" is displayed.
More specifically, the board effect device 46 is satisfied with the start condition and the movable balls 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 perform the opening operation. , And then flow into the heaven inflow space 62, and after being fitted into and supported by any of the V winning ball concave portions 68a and 68b of the heaven rotary body 67 in the heaven character apparatus 66, the ball is the special winning area 69 (see FIG. 7). When it falls to), it becomes a big hit (special game state) and the lottery effect of the round is started, according to the result of the lottery, “16R big hit”, “per 7R” and “per 3R” among three modes The effect display such as stopping at any one of the above is performed (the detailed configuration will be described later).
However, the number of rounds of jackpots is determined in advance based on the random number value extracted when winning in the first start winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34, and the start described above As in the case of the game, it is determined based on the result pattern of the stop symbol of the special view (special view display on the batch display device 50). The lottery effect of the round here will be performed based on the result decided beforehand.

As described above, when the gaming ball has won in the special winning area 69, as described above, the "16R jackpot", "per 7R", and "per 3R" are determined in advance based on the random numbers extracted when the starting winning is made. Any of the big hit (special game state) of "is generated."
In the special game state, the movable members 43a and 43b are opened and closed intermittently to be in the second state, and the movable members 43a and 43b are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 18 times). A cycle game in which the movable members 43a and 43b are opened and closed as one round until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won is achieved, and this is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) To be done.
As a result, winning on the variable winning device 35 is facilitated, and it is possible for the player to obtain gaming balls as many winning balls.
Here, the repeatable number of rounds is not determined in advance based on the random number value extracted when the start winning is achieved as described above, for example, when the special winning area 69 is won in the starting game It may be decided (for example, any of 3, 7, or 16 times), and on the condition that the special winning area 69 is to be won during the round, the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 times) is limited to the next You may proceed to the round.
The above conditions may be combined to advance to the next round if the special winning area 69 is won during the round, with the maximum number of repeatable rounds determined as a limit.
Also, at this time, the game control device 100 controls the heavenly prize device 66 by the later-described accessory motor 72 and the second motor switch 71, and the gaming ball easily wins the special prize area 69, or vice versa. It may be difficult to adjust the number of rounds that can be continued.

Here, for the convenience of description, the detailed structure of the heavenly character device 66 (guide device) will be described first.
FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the structure of the heavenly prize product device 66. As shown in FIG.
In FIG. 7, a heaven character apparatus 66 includes a heaven rotator 67, a second motor switch 71, and a character motor 72, and the power of the character motor 72 causes the gears 73a to 73c to rotate. It is transmitted to the drive shaft 74 of the heavenly rotating body 67, and the heavenly rotating body 67 rotates at a constant speed (for example, a clockwise rotation direction). Note that 73d is also a gear.
The second motor switch 71 detects the initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly prize apparatus 66, and includes a light shielding plate 76. That is, the second motor switch 71 includes a light shielding plate 76 standing against the support of the gear 73d (the support of the cross inside the gear 73d), and in the state of FIG. Is a state in which the second motor switch 71 is shielded from light, and in this state, one of the V winning concave portions 68 a and 68 b is above the special winning area 69. For example, if this state is the initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67, the second motor switch 71 detects the initial position depending on whether or not the light is blocked.

The heavenly rotating body 67 is formed in a disk shape and has two V-shaped winning recesses 68a and 68b, and a part other than the V-shaped winning recesses 68a and 68b is formed with a separated inflow space 75.
The ball is configured to fall into the special winning area 69 when the ball flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 is supported by being fitted into any of the V prize depressions 68a and 68b. A sphere passing through the area 69 is detected by the specific area switch 111.
In addition, for example, when the V winning recesses 68a and 68b come to the front of the special winning area 69 so that the balls flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 easily fit in the V winning recesses 68a and 68b to facilitate V winning. It may be configured to pause for a predetermined time. By doing so, the player can be excited and can increase the expectation for a big hit.
On the other hand, if the spheres flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 do not fit in any of the V prize recesses 68 a and 68 b, the balls fall out and flow into the inflow space 75 and pass through the remaining sphere discharge area 70. At this time, the ball passing through the remaining ball discharging area 70 is detected by the right remaining ball discharging switch 113.
The ball that has passed through the special winning area 69 also passes through the right remaining ball discharging switch 113 finally, and the ball that has passed through the special winning area 69 is also detected by the right remaining ball discharging switch 113. Therefore, the right residual ball discharge switch 113 has a function of detecting whether or not the ball having flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 remains.
In addition, the game ball which has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 is detected by the left residual ball discharge switch 112. Therefore, the ball which has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 does not remain in the left remaining ball discharge switch 112 There is a function to detect whether or not.

Next, the detailed configuration of the first character object device 51 of the seesaw structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.
FIG. 5 (a) is a front view of the first character device 51, and FIG. 5 (b) is a perspective view of the first character device 51. As shown in FIG. In these figures, the first character apparatus 51 is the above-mentioned bridge body 80, pigeon member 52, bat member 53, the character motor 81, the first motor switch 82, the character solenoid attachment 83, the character solenoid attachment A unit 84 is provided.
An accessory solenoid 203 (FIG. 10) is attached to the accessory solenoid attachment portion 83, and the accessory solenoid 203 drives the pigeon member 52 up and down. Further, an accessory solenoid 204 (FIG. 10) is attached to the accessory solenoid attaching portion 84, and the accessory solenoid 204 drives the bat member 53 up and down.

The accessory motor 81 drives the bridge body 80 so as to swing to the left and right around the center as a seesaw. Specifically, a support member 85 extending toward the accessory motor 81 is connected to the bridge main body 80, an elongated hole 86 is formed at an end of the support member 85, and the elongated hole 86 is formed. A cylindrical pin 87 is in communication. The pin 87 is connected to the accessory motor 81 via a drive mechanism 88.
The accessory motor 81 can rotate about 100 degrees in forward rotation (for example, clockwise rotation) and reverse rotation (for example, counterclockwise rotation). When the accessory motor 81 rotates forward, the accessory motor 81 Is transmitted to the pin 87 via the drive mechanism 88, and the pin 87 horizontally moves in the elongated hole 86 in which the pin 87 is in communication, thereby forming the elongated hole 86. Swings like a seesaw with the approximate center of the bridge body 80 as a fulcrum, thereby swinging like a seesaw with the bridge body 80 to which the support member 85 is connected, with the approximate center as a fulcrum ( That is, each end of the bridge main body 80 moves up and down like a seesaw) Also, each end of the bridge main body 80 is similar to that of the seesaw even when the accessory motor 81 is reversely rotated. like It moves downward.
Whether each end of the bridge body 80 is inclined is determined by whether the accessory motor 81 is rotated forward or backward. For example, when the accessory motor 81 rotates forward, it is driven to a seesaw state in which the right end of the bridge body 80 is inclined downward. At this time, the gaming balls rolling in contact with the bridge body 80 easily flow into the heaven inflow space 62. On the other hand, for example, when the accessory motor 81 is reversely rotated, it is driven to a seesaw state in which the left end of the bridge body 80 is inclined downward. At this time, the gaming ball rolling in contact with the bridge body 80 easily flows into the hell inflow space 63.

The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 inclines the bridge main body 80 to the left or right. When the bridge body 80 is not inclined to the left or right and is substantially horizontal, the support member 85 connected to the bridge body 80 is substantially vertical, and at this time, the first motor switch 82 is in the light shielding state ing. Therefore, at this time, the first motor switch 82 is in the signal form corresponding to the light blocking state (for example, since the light blocking state, the signal is output on).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the support member 85 connected to the bridge main body 80 is driven in the inclined state (right inclined state) so that the right end of the bridge main body 80 is downward. The first motor switch 82 outputs a signal to switch from light blocking to light passing. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, when the support member 85 connected to the bridge main body 80 is driven in the inclined state (left inclined state) so that the left end of the bridge main body 80 is downward. Also, the first motor switch 82 outputs a signal that switches from light shielding to light transmission.
Therefore, by monitoring the rotation direction of the accessory motor 81 and the signal form of the first motor switch 82, it can be detected to which of the left and right the bridge body 80 is inclined.

Next, the detailed configuration of the board effect device 46 disposed below the first character device 51 in the variable winning device 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
The board effect device 46 has a function as a round lottery character, and as shown in FIG. 8, includes a V big hit display unit 211, a heart big hit display unit 212, and a star big hit display unit 213. These three display units 211 to 213 are configured to be divided into three by a wall member around one axis, and are rotatable around the axis (see FIG. 9).
Then, when the lottery for the big hit is started in the game control device 100 and the result of the lottery is transmitted to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 controls the board effect device 46 according to the result of the lottery, and the V big hit display One of the unit 211, the heart big hit display part 212, and the star big hit display part 213 is directed to the front to notify the player of the current big hit.

FIG. 8A shows that the V big hit display unit 211 is selected by the control of the effect control device 300 and is directed to the front. When the V big hit display portion 211 is selected, a big hit game of “16R big hit” is started. In this case, the V big hit display portion 211 has a configuration that imitates the form of “V”, and the “V” portion has a configuration that glows golden. The above-described information display 45 is disposed below the V big hit display portion 211, and when a big hit occurs, a round hit display or the like is performed. In addition, since the information display 45 rotates and is fixed, even when the heart big hit display unit 212 or the star big hit display unit 213 is selected and faces the front, the information display 45 is as shown in FIG. It is in the same position.
FIG. 8B shows a state in which the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected by the control of the effect control device 300 and turned to the front. When the heart big hit display section 212 is selected, a "7R per" big hit game will be started. In this case, the heart jackpot display unit 212 is configured to simulate the shape of a “heart”, and the “heart” portion is formed in red. Even when the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected, it may be promoted to a V big hit equivalent to “16R big hit” during round production or during interval production.
FIG. 8C shows a state in which the star big hit display unit 213 is selected by the control of the effect control device 300 and faces the front. When the star big hit display portion 213 is selected, a big hit game of “per 3R” is started. In this case, the star jackpot display portion 213 has a configuration that imitates the shape of a "star", and the portion of the "star" is formed in blue. Even when the star big hit display portion 213 is selected, it may be promoted to a V big hit equivalent to "16 R big hit" or a heart big hit equivalent to "per 7 R" during the round effect or during the interval effect.

  Here, as the breakdown of the big hit, "16R big hit" is selected when the V big hit display portion 211 is selected, "per 7R" when the heart big hit display portion 212 is selected, and "when the star big hit display portion 213 is selected." Although it is 3R hit, but the game that determines the big hit (that is, the first game for making a big hit lottery) is also counted as one round, so it is 15 in "16R big hit" as a round with balls In the round balls out game, in the "per 7R", the round balls out game, in the "per 3R", the round balls out will be played.

Next, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the board effect device 46. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (e), the board effect device 46 has three display units 211 to 213 each having one V-big hit display 211, a heart big hit display 212, and a star big hit display 213. It is comprised so that it might be divided into three by the wall member 91 centering on 90, and it can rotate centering on the axis | shaft 90 (refer FIG. 9). The wall member 91 is fixed to the shaft 90. Each of the display portions 211 to 213 is divided into three sections by a wall member 91.
A detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 9B. In FIG. 9B, the panel effect device 46 includes a V big hit display portion 211, a heart big hit display portion 212, a star big hit display portion 213, an axis 90, a wall member In addition to 91, an effect motor 92, a first effect motor switch 93, a second effect motor switch 94, and gears 95a to 95c are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the board effect device 46 is provided with light shielding plates 96a and 96b.

The effect motor 92 applies a driving force for rotating the V big hit display portion 211, the heart big hit display portion 212, and the star big hit display portion 213 which are divided into three by the wall member 91. The force is transmitted to the shaft 90 via gears 95a to 95c in sequence, such that the shaft 90 is rotated. Since the wall member 91 is fixed to the shaft 90, the rotation of the effect motor 92 causes the shaft 90 to rotate and the wall member 91 to rotate, and stops at a predetermined position according to the result of the big hit lottery, One of the V big hit display unit 211, the heart big hit display unit 212, and the star big hit display unit 213 faces the front to perform an effect of informing the player of the current big hit.
The first effect motor switch 93 and the second effect motor switch 94 are for detecting the stop positions of the V big hit display unit 211, the heart big hit display unit 212, and the star big hit display unit 213, for example, as follows. ing.
(A) When the first effect motor switch 93 and the second effect motor switch 94 both detect the light blocking state, the V big hit display portion 211 is in the state of facing the front.
(B) When the first effect motor switch 93 detects a light passing state, and only the second effect motor switch 94 detects a light blocking state, the heart big hit display unit 212 faces the front.
(C) Only the first effect motor switch 93 detects the light blocking state, and when the second effect motor switch 94 is in the light passing state, the star big hit display portion 213 faces the front.

  Further, basically, the effect motor 92 is controlled to rotate in the order of “V big hit display unit 211” → “heart big hit display unit 212” → “star big hit display unit 213”. However, it is also possible to drive control of the effect motor 92 in reverse rotation here, any of “V big hit display part 211”, “heart big hit display part 212” and “star big hit display part 213” (or all It is also possible to drive and control the effect motor 92 so as to make the movement such as rocking). By performing such control, it is possible to perform effects of a more versatile board effect device 46.

C. Configuration of Control System Next, a control system of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. In the drawings and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to be illustrated, so it may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, and a power supply device 400 as main components of a control system.

(Game control related)
First, the configuration of the game control apparatus 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and has an input port and a CPU section 170 having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) It comprises an output unit 130 having a unit 120, an output port, a driver and the like, and a data bus 150 for connecting the CPU unit 170, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130.
Here, the game control device 100 corresponds to a control device, and constitutes an open control means, a fluctuation time selection means, a special figure fluctuation control means, and a fluctuation time storage means.

  The CPU unit 170 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 171 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operation clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 173 or the like to be generated is included. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from the voltage of 32 V DC. And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 171 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as signals is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply 400 or the main board. Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 171 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 171C in the gaming microcomputer 171 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 171. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 171 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 171A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 171B, and an RA that can be read and written as needed.
M (random access memory) 171C is provided.
The ROM 171B stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 171C stores a working area of the CPU 171A and a storage area of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 171B or the RAM 171C. The ROM 171B constitutes a fluctuation time storage unit.

In addition, the ROM 171B stores, for example, a variation pattern distribution table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of presentation, the presence or absence of reach condition occurrence, etc. . For example, as shown in FIG. 73 which will be described later, the fluctuation pattern distribution table sets the time of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66, and the open symbol of the movable members 43a and 43b in the fluctuation winning device 35 and It is a table for CPU171A to determine a fluctuation pattern with reference to patterns, such as a distribution rate etc. of a double opening design.
The variation pattern distribution table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern table selected when the special figure 1 varies, a special figure 2 variation pattern table selected when the special figure 2 varies, and the like.
In this embodiment, unlike the one-type game machine, it is a so-called feather-type game machine (pachinko machine 1), so for example, a change pattern after reaching the reach state and a change pattern before the reach state There is no table or the like for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, and the result of the special drawing fluctuation is all small hits and there is no deviation. That is, when the start winning is performed, the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 is always performed. And the number of times of opening of movable members 43a and 43b differs according to the stop design difference of the special figure.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed (for example, the special view 1 display and the special view 2 display of the collective display 50), and the display changes the time. Game state is a game state (starting game state or special game state) that is advantageous for the player when a plurality of display results are derived and displayed and the plurality of display results become a predetermined special result mode. In the pachinko machine 1, it refers to the state of the special figure fluctuation display game which is executed with a low frequency and is executed for a time longer than the execution time of the average special figure fluctuation display game.
In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is inclined. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game may be executed on another display device (for example, the information display 45) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Therefore, for example, after the decoration special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates and displays a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left and right fluctuation display areas in the display device, the fluctuation display is stopped in the order of left and right In the case where the display is displayed, the state in which the variable display is stopped in the state (for example, any of “3”, “5”, and “7”) satisfying the condition to be the special result mode is the reach in the left variable display area It becomes a state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all of the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the remaining state as the change state, except for the special result aspect), and to display the remaining one variable display area from this reach state.
And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect which is different in the possibility that the special result aspect is derived (the expectation value is different), the normal reach (N reach), the special reach (SP reach), the premiere Reach is set.

The CPU 171A executes a game control program in the ROM 171B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates a solenoid (for example, a winning prize opening solenoid 201 etc.) or a display device For example, a drive signal of the batch display device 50) is generated and output to control the entire pachinko machine 1.
In addition, although not shown, the microcomputer for game 171 is a special pattern symbol random number for determining a small hit symbol of the special figure, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (a variation display game of variation display in various reach or no reach) A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number or the like for determining the execution time etc., and a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 171A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173 And a clock generator for generating a clock for giving an update timing of the timer interrupt signal and the random number generation circuit.

  Further, the CPU 171A acquires any one variation pattern distribution table from among the plurality of variation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 171A selects and acquires any one variation pattern distribution table from among a plurality of variation pattern distribution tables based on the game result of the special view variation display game and the number of start memories, etc. Do. Here, the CPU 171A is a fluctuation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern distribution tables stored in the ROM 171B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game. It is eggplant.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.
Furthermore, when the payout control device 200 receives the release permission signal from the game control device 100 by serial communication, it outputs this release permission signal to a release control device (not shown). As a result, the launch of the gaming ball is permitted.
The launch control device receives supply of necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The firing control device controls a firing motor (not shown) for firing game balls according to the operation of the firing operation handle 11, and the firing control device receives a touch switch signal from the touch panel 16 and a signal from a firing stop switch (not shown). Has been entered. The touch switch signal is used to detect whether the player is touching the firing operation handle 11, and the firing stop switch is for temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball, and is operated by the player. is there.

A gate switch 101, a winning opening switch 102, a left large winning opening switch 103, a right large winning opening switch 104, a left starting opening switch 105, a right starting opening switch 106, and a middle starting opening switch. 107 is connected to the specific area switch 111, the left residual ball outlet switch 112, the right residual ball outlet switch 113, the effect switch 108, and the board radio wave sensor 114, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11 V and the low level is 7 V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121a, 121b is provided which receives a negative logic signal like this and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
Here, the gate switch 101 is a switch for detecting a game ball which has passed through a starting gate of a normal symbol, but in this embodiment, since this is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) having no common figure, this switch is present Without being connected, GND is connected to an external relay substrate (not shown). Therefore, in FIG. 10, it is illustrated for the gate switch (GND connection).
In addition, as shown in FIG. 10, when a relay substrate 151 having an electrical pattern for outputting a test signal (for example, a gate passing signal 1 related to a normal symbol 1) for output to the test injection test device is connected, In the embodiment, this test signal is output as always off. Such a configuration looks like a waste at first glance, but as a separate model, for example, when developing a feather mono-type gaming machine having a normal symbol and its start gate, this gaming control apparatus 100 is commonly used There is a big merit of being able to
Further, as described above, the winning opening switches 102 are for detecting gaming balls that have won in the general winning openings 36a and 36b of the gaming board 30, and 1 to n are provided according to the number of general winning openings. The left large winning opening switch 103 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure. Similarly, the right large winning opening switch 104 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure.
That is, the left special winning opening switch 103 and the right special winning opening switch 104 function as a winning opening switch for detecting a game ball that has won a prize to the variable winning device 35 which is a special winning opening.

The left starting opening switch 105 detects the gaming ball that has won the first starting winning opening 33 a of the gaming board 30. The right start opening switch 106 detects a game ball that has won the first start winning opening 33b. The middle starting opening switch 107 detects a game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 34. The effect switch 108 is disposed in the space immediately before the game ball enters the heavenly prize device 66 in the variable winning device 35, and when the game ball passes through the effect switch 108, the V of the heaven rotator 67 of the heavenly prize device 66 The inflow effect of the heavenly prize device 66 for allowing the player to expect the ball to be fitted in the winning recesses 68a and 68b is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7, the specific area switch 111 detects that the gaming ball having flowed into the heavenly prize product 66 has passed the special winning area 69. In this case, after the ball flowing into the heaven inflow space 62 of the heavenly prize product device 66 is supported by being fitted into any of the V prize recessed portions 68a and 68b, a big hit occurs when the ball falls into the special prize area 69 It will be.
The left residual ball outlet switch 112 is for detecting the game ball which has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 of the heavenly prize device 66, and has a function of detecting whether or not the ball which has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 remains. Have. Similarly, the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects both the gaming ball which has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 of the heavenly prize product device 66 and has passed through the remaining ball discharging area 70 and the gaming ball which has passed the special winning area 69. It has a function which detects whether the sphere which flowed into heaven inflow space 62 remains.
The board radio wave sensor 114 detects the emission of radio waves (for example, illegal radio waves) to the pachinko machine 1. In some cases, a plurality of board radio wave sensors may be disposed. In that case, 1 to m board radio sensors are provided.

As for proximity I / F 121a, 121b, the lead range of sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is cut by the input range being 7V-11V. It is possible to detect an abnormal state as if it were floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.
The proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided because the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The cost is reduced by using the proximity I / F 121 b smaller than the proximity I / F 121 a according to the number of input terminals which are insufficient. Note that the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided using one having the necessary number of input terminals as the proximity I / F 121a.

The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 162, the third input port 163 or the fourth input port 164, and read by the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 101, the winning opening switch 102, the left special winning opening switch 103, the right special winning opening switch 104, the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, and the middle A detection signal of the start port switch 107 is input to the second input port 162.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, detection signals of the specific area switch 111, the left residual ball outlet switch 112, the right residual ball outlet switch 113, and the effect switch 15a are input to the fourth input port 164 .
Further, signals from the first motor switch 82 and the second motor switch 71 are input to the fourth input port 164. The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 tilts the bridge main body 80 to the left or right. The second motor switch 71 detects an initial position of the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly character apparatus 66.

Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a, the abnormality detection signal 1 output when detecting an abnormality of the sensor or switch is input to the third input port 163, and of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b, a board radio wave sensor The third input port 163 also receives the detection signal 114 and the abnormality detection signal 2 that is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected.
Further, detection signals from the magnetic sensor 115 and the vibration sensor 116 are input to the third input port 163, and a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 4 A signal output based on detection) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are input.
A plurality of (for example, 1 to k) magnetic sensors 115 are disposed in the vicinity of the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 or the proximity sensor to detect an incorrect magnetism and to cover a portion likely to be applied with a magnet. ) Is provided. The vibration sensor 116 detects an incorrect vibration, and one vibration sensor 116 is disposed on a so-called veneer plate on the back side of the variable winning device 35 as a center case.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 162 and the partial output to the fourth input port 164 are transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 via the relay board 151 and are not shown. It is also supplied to the test equipment. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the left start opening switch 105, the right start opening switch 106, and the middle start opening switch 107 are input to the gaming microcomputer 171 in addition to the second input port 162. Is configured as.
As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It is supposed to be.
The data held by the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 171 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 163, the fourth input port 164, and the first input port 161 described later.

A detection signal from the glass frame open detection switch 117 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 5 and the main body frame open detection switch 118 for detecting the opening of the front frame 4 is input to the first input port 161. Out of the game abnormal status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), chute ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of gaming balls before payout), overflow switch signal (lower balls 10 stored gaming balls more than a predetermined amount) In addition to the input of a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the firing operation handle 11), a Schmidt signal, which is output when detecting that the vehicle is full (being full). Signals from the buffer 126 and the RAM initialization switch 127 are input.
The first input port 161 takes in each of the above signals and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 is provided with the above-mentioned Schmitt buffer 126 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 171 etc. Has a function of removing noise from the input signal of The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 127 are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 via the data bus 150. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 126 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 171 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 151 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 151 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test shot testing device via the relay substrate 151.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 161, 162, 163, 164 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 171 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 171 from the port is discarded by the resetting of the gaming microcomputer 171.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 171 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150, and special figure fluctuation associated with a start winning prize (for the first start winning entry 33a, 23b and the second starting winning entry 34) to a test firing test device of a recognized organization not shown. A buffer 133 that outputs special view information of a display game via the relay board 151 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch requiring no processing such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b is supplied to the test shot testing device via the relay substrate 151 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 115 and the board radio wave sensor 114, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 171 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 150 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 151 as an error signal indicating that the state is not possible. The relay board 151 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 171 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 151, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 150, and the first large winning opening solenoid 201, the second large winning opening solenoid 203, and the first combination that open and close the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 respectively. The accessory solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 in the object device 51 up and down, and the second for outputting the open / close data of the accessory sorenoy 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first character device 51 up and down An output port 134 is provided.
The output unit 130 also includes a fifth output port 137 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; A sixth output port 138 is provided to output on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a seventh output port 139 and a sixth output port 138 for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 152. The external information terminal board 152 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The seventh output port 139 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

The output unit 130 further includes a first large winning opening solenoid 201, a second large winning opening solenoid 203, and a second large winning opening solenoid 203 for driving the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 output from the second output port 134 respectively. (1) An item solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 in the character apparatus 51 up and down, and an open / close data signal of the product sonoy 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first character apparatus 51 up and down The first driver (drive circuit) 140 that generates and outputs a drive signal, the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly prize apparatus 66 output from the third output port 135, and the seesaw to the bridge main body 80 in the first prize apparatus 51 And generates a solenoid drive signal by receiving an open / close data signal of the accessory motor 81 driven up and down as shown in FIG. Driver (drive circuit) 141, a third driver 142 for outputting an ON / OFF drive signals of the current supply side of the segment lines of the connected monitor LED153 outputted from the fourth output port 136 is provided.
Here, the connection monitor LED 153 lights up when the game control apparatus 100 which is the main board is activated, and has a function of monitoring that the main board is in operation. In addition, there is an advantage that the fourth output port 136 can be used corresponding to the increased components when the components operated by the game control apparatus 100 increase in the future.
The connection monitor LED 153 may be connected to the signal line output from the fourth output port 136 in a one-to-one correspondence, or one may be connected to a plurality of signal lines. It is also good.
Further, the output unit 130 outputs from the fourth driver 143 and the sixth output port 138 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the fifth output port 137. External information signal supplied from the fifth driver 144, the seventh output port 139 and the sixth output port 138 to an external device such as a management device from the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of Is provided to the external information terminal board 152.

The first driver 140 is capable of driving a solenoid operating at 32 V (a first large winning opening solenoid 201, a second large winning opening solenoid 202, a prize solenoid 203, a prize solenoid 204). DC 32 V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as Further, to the second driver 141, DC12V is supplied from the power supply apparatus 400 as a power supply voltage in order to be able to drive a motor (the product motor 72 and the product motor 81) operating at 12V. Similarly, in order to drive the connection monitor LED 153 operating at 12 V, DC 12 V is supplied from the power supply apparatus 400 as the power supply voltage to the third driver 142.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the fourth driver 143 which drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. The fifth driver 144 for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data by the current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12 V or 5 V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the fourth driver 143 that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the fifth driver 144 that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The sixth driver 145 for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal plate 152 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 140 and the like may be provided on the relay board 151 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 146 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 146 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 171 can transmit and receive data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 161, 162, 163 and 164 are provided. Absent.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
Here, in the first embodiment, under the control of the effect control device 300, the information display 45 provided with the LED is disposed below the center case of the game board 30, and the information display 45 displays various gaming states, Although round display and the like are performed, FIG. 11 shows an example in which a liquid crystal information display device 451 using liquid crystal is adopted instead of the information display 45 having an LED as a modification of the first embodiment.
In the following description, while the configuration employing the liquid crystal information display device 451 is described, the configuration is also described with reference to the information display 45.

The effect control device 300 displays an image on the liquid crystal information display device 451 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 171 and the main control microcomputer 311. Display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 13a, 13b, and 13c. .
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 11, in the configuration adopting the liquid crystal information display device 451, the liquid crystal information display device 451 includes various image displays under the control of the VDP 312 according to the command from the effect control device 300. It will be a round display and the like of the jackpot, it is possible to perform a colorful and powerful presentation.
In addition, in FIG. 11, when using the information display 45 provided with LED instead of the liquid crystal information display device 451 (case of Example 1), a circuit similar to the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 described later is used. In the same way as shown in FIG. 10, an output port and a driver are disposed for the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340 and connected to the information display 45. do it.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 171, determines the effect contents, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output image, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) Is connected.
Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

From VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the liquid crystal information display device 451 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 5 or the game board 30 and the data transmission timing are given. The synchronization signal STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the liquid crystal information display device 451 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted through the signal conversion circuit 313 to the liquid crystal information display device. It is displayed on 451.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speakers 13a and 13b provided on the glass frame 5 and the lower speaker 13c provided on the operation panel 6, The sound generated by the LSI 314 is output from the upper speakers 13a and 13b and the lower speaker 13c via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command (effect command) transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 171 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a panel decoration device 351 having an LED (a light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the variable winning device 35 as a center case). The frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device 352 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 5 and provided on the game board 30 (including the variable winning device 35 as a center case) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the panel effect device 46 is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the glass frame 5 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 15a incorporated in the effect button 15 provided on the operation panel 6, the touch panel 16 provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 15, the inside of the panel effect device 46 The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect motor switches 93 and 94 for detecting the initial position etc. of the effect motor 92 and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the volume control provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of the switch 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, liquid crystal information display device 451 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker Is configured to generate Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 47 for cooling each part of the pachinko machine 1 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 47 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

D. Operation of Control System Next, control of the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) which performs such a game will be described.
First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 171 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 171 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control apparatus 100 (game microcomputer 171) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main processing is started based on that the gaming microcomputer 171 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 400 is turned on, the reset signal from the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is a game control device at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period at power on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 171 is turned on after being input to 100 and the reset signal is released thereafter, the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Also at the time of power recovery from a power failure, the reset signal is similarly turned on and then released, and the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated. Further, when the operator intends to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control apparatus 100, it is necessary to turn on the power switch while turning on the RAM initialization switch 127.

Then, when the gaming microcomputer 171 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer is set which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. A pointer setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4).
In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the high order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the input port 1 (first input port 161), and the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read before the start of the standby time. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 127 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated after waiting of the standby time or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 127. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and the data bus (for example, 2 times) (step S8) Perform (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; YES), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; NO), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.
If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; NO), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; NO), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; YES), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).
Here, in the present embodiment, RWM refers to the RAM 171C, but the present invention is not limited to the RAM, and may be used as the RWM including a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM.

Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 171, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the input port 1 (first input port 161), it is determined whether the initialization switch (the RAM initialization switch 127, hereinafter the same) is turned on (step S16).
If the initialization switch is off (step S16; NO), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; YES), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; YES), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; YES), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 13 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  If it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; YES), or if it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; NO or step S18; NO) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; NO), the process proceeds to step S406 in FIG. 13 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

In step S21 of FIG. 13, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.
Next, the number of ball biting processing in the motor control areas 1 and 2 is cleared to "0" (step S22). In this process, it is determined whether or not the accessory motor 72 for driving the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly prize product device 66 has caused the bite, and when the bite is caused, it is to be avoided. The number of times to count the process is cleared to "0" in advance, and whether or not the accessory motor 81 for driving the bridge main body 80 in the first When the ball biting occurs, the number of times to count the process for avoiding it is cleared to "0" in advance.
Here, the motor control area 1 corresponds to the product motor 81, and the motor control area 2 corresponds to the product motor 72.

The background will be described.
For convenience of explanation, the function motor 81 will be described first.
When the game ball flows into the first prize device 51 into the prize space 41 at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable prize device 35 perform the opening operation when the start condition is satisfied, the gaming ball is of the first prize device 51. The bridge body 80 contacts the bridge body 80 and rolls and flows into either the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63. In this process, the bridge body 80 and the first role apparatus 51 in which the game balls are driven by the function motor 81. There is a possibility that the so-called ball biting may occur due to the sound being pinched between the inner wall surface and the like.
If the ball bite occurs, for example, the character motor 81 is reversely rotated to increase the distance between the bridge main body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first piece 51, etc. Often resolve.
On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the heavenly prize apparatus 66, the game ball rolls on the heaven rotary body 67 and either fits or does not fit into the V prize recessed portions 68a and 68b. The game ball may be pinched between the heavenly rotating body 67 driven by the character motor 72 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly character device 66 and the like, causing a noise and causing so-called ball biting.
In the case where the ball bite occurs, for example, the character motor 72 is reversely rotated to increase the distance between the heaven rotator 67 and the inner wall surface of the heavenly character device 66, etc. Often resolve.
From the background as described above, in step S22, the number of ball catching processings of the motor control areas 1 and 2 is cleared to "0".

  Then, after step S22, the command for power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special drawing game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) Step S23), the process proceeds to step S29. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S23, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a game state designation command, a screen designation command (a customer demonstration command if waiting for customers, a command for recovery otherwise) Send multiple commands. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the effect frequency information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S24, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S24), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S25), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S26). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.
In the case of this embodiment, in step S28, a model designation command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying the light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are used to initialize the RAM. And a plurality of commands such as a command for causing notification of Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the effect frequency information command is also transmitted.

  In step S29, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 171 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 171. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 173, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 171A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S29, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S30). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 171A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (special symbol pattern random number) (step S31), an interrupt is permitted in step S33 as described later.
In this embodiment, it is substantially one of the special symbol design random numbers to determine the initial value random number, and in that case, the soft random number register 1 may be prepared as a predetermined register (soft random number register). become. On the other hand, when there are a large number of random numbers for which the initial value random numbers are to be determined, n predetermined numbers of soft random number registers 1 to n are prepared as predetermined registers.
The random number generation circuit in the CPU 171A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of the initial value random number. This makes it possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

After passing through step S31, next, the on data of the connection monitor LED 153 is output (step S32).
In this embodiment, a large number of output ports are prepared so that the game control apparatus 100 as a main board can be used in common between different models. Specifically, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the fourth output port 136 via the driver 142. Incidentally, two function motors 72 and 81 are connected to the third output port 135 via the driver 141. In this manner, drive data can be output to two more motors at one output port.
Therefore, by arranging the fourth output port 136 in this embodiment, two more motors can be added if the connection monitor LED 153 is removed. Therefore, the connection monitor LED 153 is connected to the remaining output port (in this case, the fourth output port 136) of the current model, and addition of a motor is performed while monitoring that the main board (game control device 100) is operating. It is easy to do.

After the step S32, the interrupt is permitted in the step S33 as described above.
Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S34, and a process of updating the special symbol initial value random number by "+1" (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol initial value random number update process) is performed. This is to break the regularity of the random number by updating the special symbol initial value random number by "+1". Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, initial values are set to one random number (special symbol symbol initial value random number).
Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, a random number (special symbol random number) for determining a hit symbol on a special figure is generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. It is done. In addition, in the random number which decides the hitting design of the special figure, so-called “initial value change method” which changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round is adopted . Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round.

  After the special symbol initial value random number updating process of step S34, set the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus (step S35) ), It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S36; NO), the process returns to the special symbol initial value random number updating process (step S34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the special symbol initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By enabling the interrupt before the special symbol initial value random number update process (step S34) (step S33), when the timer interrupt occurs during the special symbol initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed As a result, it is possible to avoid that the interrupt process is stressed by waiting for the timer interrupt by the special symbol initial value random number update process.

  In addition to the main processing, the special symbol initial value random number update process in step S34 has a method of performing the special symbol initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process, and such a method is adopted. In order to avoid the special symbol initial value random number update process being executed in both cases, when performing the special symbol initial value random number update process in the main process, prohibit the interrupt and then update the interrupt It is necessary to release, but special symbol initial value random number update processing in timer interrupt processing is not done like this example, and it is special symbol initial value random number update processing only in main processing There is no problem in releasing the interrupt before, which has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S36; YES), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S35 (step S37). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S37; NO), the process returns to the determination (step S36) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S37; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S38) A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S40), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S41). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S42) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process (step S43) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, the access to the RWM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S44), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) operates the RAM 171C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 127) capable of external operation, and the initialization operation unit And initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 171C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 171C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S42) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step S51, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address, and at step S52, the number of repetitions is set. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of RWM being used. Next, in step S53, "0" is set as the calculated value, and in step S54, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", and in step S56, the repeat number is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed or not. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the determination result of step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. When the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine is ended.
In this way, calculation of the checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM is performed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 15, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 171A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 171, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 15 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S61). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S63) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the solenoid etc. (the first large winning opening solenoid 201, the second large winning opening solenoid 202, the bonus solenoids 203 and 204, the bonus motor 72, the bonus motor 81) An output process (step S64) for performing drive control of the actuator is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The release permission signal is output to the release control device (not shown) via the payout control device 200. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the release permission status as viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (emission permission signal) indicating the release permission status as viewed from the payout control device 200. It is generated in the payout control device 200 and is output to the emission control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S65) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 and a random number update process 1 (step S66) are performed. After that, the winning opening switch 102, the left big winning opening switch 103, the right large winning opening switch 104, the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, the middle starting opening switch 107, the specific area switch 111, the left remaining ball outlet switch 112, prize winning to perform monitoring of whether there is an input of a normal signal from right residual ball discharge port switch 113 and effect switch 108, and monitoring of an error (whether front frame 4 or glass frame 5 is open, etc.) A mouth switch / status monitoring process (step S67) is performed.
Further, a residual ball monitoring process is performed (step S68). The remaining ball monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not the gaming ball that has won the fluctuation winning device 35 escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the fluctuation winning device 35 internally. is there.
Next, a game stop error process is performed (step S69). In the game stop error process, when there is an error (such as radio wave irregularity) which stops the game, while stopping the game, it is monitored whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127 or the like to cancel the error. It is a thing.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error operation is in progress (step S70). This is to determine whether an error such as radio wave fraud has occurred, for example, and it is in operation. If an error operation is not in progress (step S70; NO), it is determined whether or not an error release is waiting (step S71). On the other hand, if an error operation is in progress (step S70; YES), the process jumps to step S74.
If the release of the error is awaited (step S71; YES), it is determined that the error is not yet removed, and the process jumps to step S76. Therefore, in this case, each processing of step S72 to step S75 is not performed, and the special figure game or the motor control of the first role device 51 and the heaven role device 66 is not performed, and the game game is absent.
On the other hand, if not waiting for error release (step S71; NO), special figure game processing is performed (step S72), and segment LED editing processing is performed (step S73). The special figure game process is a process related to the special figure variation display game, and the segment LED editing process is provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the desired content of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation display game display and various information about the game Drive to display.

Next, a motor control process is performed to perform motor control on the first character apparatus 51 and the heaven character apparatus 66 (step S74), and a command for causing the first character apparatus 51 and the heaven character apparatus 66 to perform rendering operations A feature presentation command editing process is performed (step S75).
When the process proceeds from step S75 to step S76 or when the process jumps from step S71 to step S76, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is performed in step S76. This monitors the gaming balls having flowed into the first character device 51 and the gaming balls discharged from the first character device 51, and the number of the gaming balls discharged is larger than the number of the gaming balls flowing into the first character device 51. Is to perform processing such as judging that there is a possibility of fraud and abnormality and stopping the game.
Next, a fraud monitoring process is performed (step S77). This is a process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 115 to determine whether there is an abnormality, monitoring of a magnet irregularity, or checking a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 114 to perform a process of determining whether there is an abnormality It performs radio wave fraud monitoring.

Next, a launch control process is performed (step S78). This is to save the output data of the firing stop when there is an error such as stopping the game, or save the output data of the firing permission if such an error has not occurred. It is a thing.
Then, an external information editing process (step S79) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S62) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the address of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is prepared (step S91). In the present embodiment, "prepare" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.
Next, the address of the switch control area 1 in the RWM is prepared in step S92, and unused bit data is prepared in step S93, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S94. For example, since the RAM initialization switch 127 needs to invert the detection signal, it prepares bit data of such a sensor / switch.
Here, unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Although the names in the flowchart are the same for bit data, unused bit data and inverted bit data are different. However, as a result, it may be data of the same value.

Next, in step S95, the switch reading process is performed on the input port 1 (first input port 161).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) are as follows.
· Glass frame open detection switch 117 (bit 0)
. Body frame open detection switch 118 (bit 1)
· RAM initialization switch 127 (bit 2) (inverted bit)
· Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3)
・ Delivery error status signal (bit 4)
· Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 5)
· Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
・ Touch switch signal (bit 7)
Information on the switch to be monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 161) is read by the processing from step S91 to step S95 described above.

Subsequently, similarly, processing of reading information on a switch to be monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 162) is performed.
First, in step S96, the address of the input port 2 (second input port 162) is prepared, and then, in step S97, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S98, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S99.
Next, in step S100, a switch reading process is performed on the input port 2 (first input port 162).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (first input port 162) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 2 has no inverted bit.
Left start opening switch 105 (bit 0): "start opening 1 winning signal"
Here, the left start port switch 105 is also output as a "start port 1 winning signal" of the test signal by pattern branching, and this is the same for each switch described later, and they are described on the right side of each bit mode There is.
Middle start opening switch 107 (bit 1): "Start opening 2 winning signal"
Right start opening switch 106 (bit 2): "start opening 3 winning signal"
-Left winning opening switch 102-1 (bit 3): "Normal winning opening 1 winning signal"
・ Right winning opening switch 102-2 (bit 4): "Normal winning opening 2 winning signal"
Here, as described above, the winning opening switches 102 detect gaming balls that have won in the general winning openings 36a and 6b, and it is described that 1 to n are provided according to the number of the general winning openings. There is. In the first embodiment, two general winning openings 36a and 6b are provided as the general winning openings, so the winning opening switch corresponding to each of the general winning openings 36a and 6b is the left winning opening switch for convenience of explanation. A switch detection signal to the input port 2 (first input port 162) is processed as a right winning opening switch 102-2 102-1.
・ Large big winning a prize mouth switch 103 (bit 5): "special electric feature 1 prize signal 1"
・ Right big winning a prize mouth switch 104 (bit 6): "special electric feature 1 prize signal 2"
Unused (bit 7): The circuit is connected to a relay board (not shown) as a gate switch spare, and is fixed to GND connection (Low: 0) on the relay board so as to be always off.
Information on the switch to be monitored at the input port 2 (second input port 162) is read by the processing from step S96 to step S100 described above.

Subsequently, similarly, processing of reading information on a switch to be monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) is performed.
First, the address of the input port 3 (third input port 163) is prepared in step S101, and then the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S102. Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S103, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S104.
Next, in step S105, a switch reading process is performed on the input port 3 (third input port 163).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 163) are as follows.
· Board radio wave sensor 114 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
Magnetic sensor 115 (bit 2)
・ Frame electric wave error signal (bit 3)
・ Discharge busy signal (bit 4)
Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 5)
· Vibration sensor 116 (bit 6) (inverted bit)
Unused (bit 7)
Here, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is an abnormality detection signal 1 which is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among outputs of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is an abnormality detection signal 2 which is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
Information on the switch to be monitored at the input port 3 (third input port 163) is read by the processing from step S101 to step S105 described above.

Then, similarly, processing of reading information on a switch to be monitored by the input port 4 (fourth input port 164) is performed.
First, in step S106, the address of the input port 6 (sixth input port 166) is prepared, and then, in step S107, the address of the switch control area 4 in the RWM is prepared. Next, in step S108, unused bit data is prepared, and in step S109, bit data to be inverted is prepared.
Next, in step S110, switch reading processing is performed on the input port 4 (the fourth input port 164).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 4 (the fourth input port 164) are as follows. The switch monitored by the input port 4 has no inverted bit.
Specific area switch 111 (bit 0):
Here, as described above, the specific area switch 111 detects that the gaming ball having flowed into the heavenly prize product device 66 has passed the special winning area 69, and has a function of detecting the V winning, and this embodiment In the example, the detection signal of the specific area switch 111 is also output as "condition device operation area 1 passage signal 1" and "character continuous operation region 1 passage signal 1".
Note that "condition device operation area 1 passage signal 1" and "character product continuous operation area 1 passage signal 1" are one of the same test signals as the above-mentioned "starting opening 1 winning signal" and the like.
· Right residual ball outlet switch (bit 1):
This switch is for detecting the game ball that has escaped from the heaven inflow space 62 by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113, and is also output as "special electric character 1 discharge port passage signal 1" .
-Left residual ball outlet switch (bit 2):
This switch is a left residual ball discharge port switch 112, and detects a game ball that has escaped from the hell inflow space 63, and is also output as a "special electric character 1 discharge port passage signal 2". .
・ Effect switch 108 (bit 3)
Unused (bit 4): Circuit-connected to a relay board (not shown) as motor switch spare 2 and fixed to GND connection (Low: 0) on the relay board so as to be always off state Unused (bit 5 ): Circuit connection is made to a relay board (not shown) as motor switch spare 1 and GND connection (Low: 0) is fixed on the relay board so as to be always off.-Second motor switch (bit 6): Heaven role It is for detecting the rotational position (the position of the heavenly gift device 66) of the accessory motor 72 disposed in the item device 66.
· First motor switch (bit 7): for detecting the rotational position of the accessory motor 81 (tilt of the bridge main body 80 in the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure) disposed in the first accessory device 51 is there.

After passing through step S110, the process advances to step S111 to take the exclusive OR of the previous final state and the current final state inverted, save as a falling edge in RWM, and complete the input process.
This is achieved by increasing the processable amount within the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle and performing structure design etc. by performing the switch reading process twice within one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. Make a balance. The details will be described later in the switch reading process routine.

[Switch reading process]
Next, a subroutine of switch reading processing (steps S95, S100, S105, and S110) in the above-described input processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S121). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S122), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step S123), and then the target switch control area in RWM is The port input state 1 is saved (stored) (step S124). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms = 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S125).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S126). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S127), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S128), and then the port input state of the target switch control area It is saved (stored) in 2 (step S129). Thereafter, the bit changed in the first and second reading, that is, the signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S130). Specifically, of the states of the input port to be read, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state as the first and second times is “1” and the other bit is “0”. Then, the logical product of the determined bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and it is set as the current determined bit (step S131).

  Then, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the status is the same bit 0 and different bits 1 in the first and second readings (step S132), and the logical AND of the indeterminate bit pattern and the final status at the previous interrupt Is set as the previously held bit (step S133). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current decided state (step S134), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and current decided states, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge ( Step S135), ends the switch reading process.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for a time more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, in order to slow down the design of the electric circuit for extending the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch It is necessary to design the ball flow path of the
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, the processable amount within the interrupt due to extending the timer interrupt cycle It is possible to balance the increase with the ease of structural design and the like, and to avoid the problems as described above.

[Output processing]
Next, an output process (step S64) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 137 (see FIG. 10) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device 50 is turned off (step S141). Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated ((+1) update in the range of 0 to 3) (step S142).
In the present embodiment, the collective display unit 50 is an example of LEDs and is dynamically lit. Here, "special symbol display unit", "special view reserve", "playing state display (except in big hit, big hit) Information is displayed.

Subsequently, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (loaded) (step S143). Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S144). The external information to be synthesized here is information on "door / frame open" and "security signal".
Next, the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (sixth port 138) (step S145). The sixth port 138 is an output port for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is connected.
Next, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal substrate 152 are loaded and synthesized (step S146).
As external information to be synthesized here. It is as follows.
・ Big jack 1 signal ・ Big jack 2 signal ・ Prize prize number signal ・ Big number signal ・ Starting opening 1 signal ・ Starting opening 2 signal ・ Main prize ball signal

Next, the combined data is output to the external information / emission permission signal output port (seventh port 139) (step S148). The seventh port 136 is an output port for outputting information regarding the pachinko machine 1 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 152 as external information. Next, it is determined whether or not an error to stop the game has occurred (step S149). If no error to stop the game has occurred (step S149; YES), the process proceeds to step S150. On the other hand, if an error to stop the game has occurred (step S149; NO), the process branches to step S153.
If the process proceeds to step S150, the output data of the segment line is loaded (acquired) from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter in step S150, and the acquired segment output data is a port for segment output Output to (fifth port 137). The fifth port 137 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the batch display device 50.
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port are combined and output to the second port 134 (step S151). The second port 134 is a port for outputting data to be output to the solenoid, and the solenoid corresponding to the data to be output here is as follows.
・ The first big winning hole solenoid 201
・ The second big winning hole solenoid ・ Special item solenoid 203
· Feature solenoid 204

After step S151, the process proceeds to step S152.
On the other hand, if it is determined NO in the previous step S149, as described above, the process branches to step S153 to output off data to the solenoid output port. As a result, the off data is output to the second port 134 for outputting the solenoid output data, so that the above-mentioned first big winning opening solenoid 201, the second big winning opening solenoid, the bonus solenoid 203, the role solenoid The object solenoids 204 are all off and do not operate.
And if it passes through step S153, it will progress to step S152.
If it progresses from step S151 or step S153 to step S153, it will be determined whether it is waiting for error cancellation | release in this step S152. If not waiting for error release (step S152; NO), it is determined that the game may be advanced, and data to be output to the motor output port (third output port 135) is combined and output in step S154.
The third output port 135 is a port for outputting motor output data, and the motor corresponding to the data to be output here is as follows.
-A prize motor 72: Drives the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heaven prize device 66-A prize motor 81: Drives the bridge main body 80 of the first prize device 51 Will be allowed.
On the other hand, if waiting for error release (step S152; YES), it is necessary to wait until the error is released, so it is determined that the game does not proceed, and the motor output port (third output port 135) is determined in step S155. Output off data to). As a result, the operation of the accessory motor 72 and the accessory motor 81 is not permitted.

After passing through step S154 or step S155, the process proceeds to step S156 to load and combine the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test injection test apparatus, and the test terminal output port provided on the relay substrate 151 The data synthesized to 1 is output (step S156). Thereafter, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay substrate 151 (step S157).
Next, output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test injection test device are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay substrate 151 (step S158). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay substrate 151 (step S159). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay substrate 151 (step S160). End the output process of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S65) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls), the number of winnings to be checked It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the counter area 2 (step S171).
The structure of the winning number counter area 2 is, for example, as follows.
· 3 prize ball counter · 10 prize ball counter · 14 prize ball counter Each winning number counter area can be stored up to 255 winnings, in the check of the winning number counter area 2, the counter mentioned above From (from 3 prize ball counter) it checks in order.
Although there is also a winning number counter area 1, this will be described in detail later.

Returning to the flow, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (step S171: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S172), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check has been completed (step S173). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S173; YES), the process jumps to step S182.
On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S173; NO), the process returns to step S171 and the above process is repeated.

If it is determined in step S171 that the winning number counter area 2 has a count (step S171; YES), the process proceeds to step S174. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S174), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (step S175). Next, the value of the remaining number field of winning balls and the number of payouts this time are added (step S176), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number field of remaining balls (step S177). As a result, the number of payouts this time is added to the value of the remaining number field of winning balls until the previous time, and the total value of this time is saved in the remaining number field of winning balls.
The number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is incremented by (+1) each time the number of remaining prize balls is ten, and the number is updated (details will be described later).
Next, "10" is subtracted from the addition result of step S177 (step S178), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S179). If the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S179; YES), the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by adding (+1) (step S180), and then the current subtraction is "0" or more. The result is saved in the winning ball remaining number area (step S181). After step S181, the process returns to step S178 to repeat the loop. Therefore, a winning ball is generated by the game, the number of payouts is added to the value of the remaining number field of winning balls until the previous time, "10" is subtracted from the addition result, as long as the subtraction result is "0" or more, The processing from step S178 to step S181 is repeated.
Then, if the subtraction result is less than "0" (step S179; NO), the process branches to step S182 and proceeds.

Here, among the processing shown in FIG. 19, the processing in the left column in the drawing (steps S171 to S181) is in charge of the processing for updating the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal. On the other hand, among the processing shown in FIG. 19, the processing (steps S182 to S191) in the right column in the figure described later is in charge of the processing of transmitting the payout command.
Returning to the flow, when the process proceeds to step S182, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the payout command transmission timer is updated (-1) (that is, subtracted by (-1)). This is not to send out a dispensing command for each timer interrupt, but to count the lapse of the predetermined time in order to send it after a predetermined time. It should be noted that, as a premise for transmitting the payout command, for example, it is also a condition that the payout control device 200 (payout control board) side can pay out the winning balls.
Then, it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S183), and if the payout command transmission timer has not become "0" (step S183; NO), the current routine is ended. Return Therefore, this routine is repeated until the payout command transmission timer becomes "0".

Then, when the payout command transmission timer becomes “0” (step S183; YES), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S184). In the determination of step S184, the status of the output port is not checked, but the payout busy signal flag is checked and determined. If the payout busy signal is busy (step S184; YES), the current routine is ended and returns. Therefore, this routine will be repeated until the payout busy signal is not busy.
Here, the conditions under which the payout busy signal is busy are as follows.
・ During out operation ・ During ball lending operation ・ During shooting ball out error ・ In overflow error ・ During frame electric wave illegal occurrence ・ Due to failure of detecting ball detection switch: (Switch to monitor the disbursed ball)
・ During out of payout error ・ During overdelivery error ・ When there is a count of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board (unpaid prize ball number = winning game ball number remaining) (when not 0)

If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S184; NO), a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls) Among them, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 1 which is to be checked (step S185).
The structure of the winning number counter area 1 is, for example, as follows.
· 3 prize ball counter · 10 prize ball counter · 14 prize ball counter Each winning number counter area can be stored up to 65535 winnings, in the winning number counter area 1 check, the counter mentioned above from the top We check in order (from three prize ball counters).

Returning to the flow, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area 1 (step S185: NO), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S186), and all the winning number counter areas are counted. It is determined whether the number check has been completed (step S187). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (Step S187; YES), the payout command transmission process is terminated and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S187; NO), the process returns to step S185 to repeat the above process.

If it is determined in step S185 that the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S185; YES), the process proceeds to step S188. Then, the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S188), and a payout command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is obtained (step S189). Then, the acquired payout command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S190). Thus, a payout command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 at a predetermined timing. Next, an initial value is stored in the payout command transmission timer area (step S191). The payout command transmission timer area is an area to which the value of the payout command transmission timer described in step S182 described above is written. After passing through step S191, the payout command transmission process ends, and the process returns.
By the above processing, a payout command instructing payout of the gaming balls to the payout control device 200 is transmitted, and the payout control device 200 performs processing for paying out the gaming balls based on the payout command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, random number update processing 1 (step S66) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the special symbol random number.
In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the special symbol symbol random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S201).
If the special design symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; NO), the random number updating process 1 is ended. On the other hand, when the special symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S201; YES), the special symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S202), and the next initial initial of the loaded special symbol random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S203), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / status monitoring processing is processing for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (change in signal) from switches provided in various winning openings, and monitoring the status.
In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the left large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the left large winning opening switch 103 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 is input, or the signal) Data indicating the bit position and the like in the port of (1) is prepared (step S211). The left big winning opening switch 103 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure.
When the movable members 43 a and 43 b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the gaming balls flow into the first feature device 51 via the winning space 41.
In this embodiment, two switches, the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104, are provided as switches for detecting game balls flowing into the first item device 51, and flowed into the first item device 51. The game ball is detected by either the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104, so here the left large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to one left large winning opening switch 103. Next, while monitoring that the variable winning device 35 does not have an incorrect prize even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, the fraud & prize for detecting a normal prize The monitoring process (step S212) is performed.

Thereafter, the right large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the right large winning opening switch 104 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the right large winning opening switch 104 is input, the bit position of the signal in the port, etc. Data is stored (step S213). The right large winning opening switch 104 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure.
In this embodiment, two switches, the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104, are provided as switches for detecting game balls flowing into the first item device 51, and flowed into the first item device 51. The game ball is detected by either the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104, so here the right large winning opening switch monitoring table corresponding to the other right large winning opening switch 104 Next, while monitoring that the variable winning device 35 does not have an incorrect prize even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, the fraud & prize for detecting a normal prize The monitoring process (step S214) is performed.

Subsequently, a prize monitoring table of the prize hole switch which can always be prized is prepared (step S215). There are the following as a winning opening switch that can always be won.
・ Left start port switch 105
・ Medium start port switch 107
・ Right start port switch 106
・ Left winning opening switch 102-1: "Normal winning opening 1 winning signal"
・ Right winning opening switch 102-2: "Normal winning opening 2 winning signal"
Here, as described above, the winning opening switches 102 detect gaming balls that have won in the general winning openings 36a and 6b, and it is described that 1 to n are provided according to the number of the general winning openings. There is. In the first embodiment, two general winning openings 36a and 6b are provided as the general winning openings, so the winning opening switch corresponding to each of the general winning openings 36a and 6b is the left winning opening switch for convenience of explanation. A switch detection signal to the input port 2 (first input port 162) is processed as a right winning opening switch 102-2 102-1.

Subsequently, a winning number counter updating process is performed to update the winning number (step S216). The detailed procedure of the winning number counter update process will be described later.
Next, the state scan counter is updated ("+1" update in the range of 0 to 3) (step S217). The state scan counter is used to designate in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals for which an error should be monitored as the gaming machine state is to be the target of the current monitoring.
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S218).
The types of errors to be monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 as gaming machine statuses are as follows, and these are for monitoring the shoot ball out switch from the payout control device 200, overflow switch, and abnormality of the payout control device 200. Respond to errors etc.
(A) When 0: Switch error (such as connector disconnection or switch failure)
(B) 1: When the shoot ball out error (c) 2: When the overflow error (d) 3: Dispensing error

Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S219). This is to check an error on the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 1 (details will be described later).
Subsequently, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S220).
The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 as gaming machine statuses are as follows, and these include the glass frame opening detection switch 117, the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and the frame radio wave from the payout control device 200 Correspond to signals, touch switch signals, etc.
(E) When 0: Glass frame 5 open (front frame open)
(F) In 1: front frame 4 open (play slot open)
(G) 2: Frame radio wave irregularity (h) 3: Touch switch on (Touching the launch operation handle 11 turns on the touch switch provided on the launch operation handle 11)
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S221). This is to check an error on the prepared gaming machine state monitoring table 2 (details will be described later).
Next, it is determined whether the status scan counter is "0". Since the status scan counter is updated by "+1" in the range of 0 to 3, it is determined here whether it is "0" or not.
If the status scan counter is not "0" (step S222; NO), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended and the process returns. Therefore, the routine is repeated at this time.

On the other hand, if the status scan counter is "0" (step S222; YES), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S223).
As a type of error monitored by the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 as the gaming machine status, there is a switch abnormality 2 error. The switch abnormality 2 error is an error when an abnormality such as disconnection of a connector in various sensors or switches connected to the proximity I / F 121 b is detected.
Next, a gaming machine state check process is performed (step S224). This is to check an error prepared on the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (details will be described later).
Next, a payout busy signal check process is performed (step S224). This is to check if the payout busy signal is busy or not. Since the status scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times. Therefore, the delivery busy signal is monitored (checked) in a cycle of 16 ms.
After passing through step S224, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S212 and S214) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the prize monitoring process, each of the two left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 for detecting the game balls winning in the variable prize device 35, the left start mouth switch 105 as a prize opening switch which can always be prized, In the process performed for middle start opening switch 107, right start opening switch 106, left winning opening switch 102-1 (normal winning opening 1 winning signal), right winning opening switch 102-2 (normal winning opening 2 winning signal) is there. In the variable winning device 35, since the movable members 43a and 43b are forcibly opened to insert the gaming balls and the winning balls are paid out, it is easy to perform fraud monitoring.
Here, in describing the fraud & prize monitoring process in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table to be prepared is as follows.
・ Data to judge whether there is input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent prize number area ・ Incorrect prize winning error notification command ・ illegal prize number upper limit value (illegal occurrence judgment number)
· Address of the winning opening switch table · Notification timer update information (permission / update)

  In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S231), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step S232). During the special game state in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened when the prize monitoring switch subject to error monitoring is the two left big prize opening switch 103 and the right big prize opening switch 104 during the fraud monitoring period. It is a period other than.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S232; YES), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S233). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S233; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S242). Also, if there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S233; YES), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S234), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of illegal occurrences to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not 5) is exceeded (step S235). The number of fraud determinations is not limited to five, for example, and can be set to a different value for each target winning opening switch, and it may be that way, but in this embodiment the same for all winning opening switches. It is a value.

The determination number is set to five, for example, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 (generally referred to as a big winning opening) in the open state is converted to the closed state The game ball is pinched by the door members (here, movable members 43a and 43b) of the mouth (that is, the variable winning device 35), and the game ball is a count switch (each of the two left big winning hole switch 103 and This is so as not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player wins after the effective period or noises on the signal, and it is not easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate. The number of determinations may be set to one, for example, for a place where the condition for fraud monitoring is to be made severe.
Then, if it is determined that the determination number is not exceeded (step S235; NO), the process jumps to step S240 and prepares a prize monitoring table of the target prize hole switch. If the determined number is exceeded (step S235; YES), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of determined frauds (step S236), and the initial value is saved in the target incorrect winning notification timer area (step S237). For example, 60000 ms is set as an initial value of the incorrect prize notification timer.
Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S238), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S239), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S240). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S232; NO), the prize monitoring table of the target prize opening switch is prepared (step S240), and a prize number counter updating process (step S241) for setting a prize ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S 242), and it is determined whether the notification timer update permission is present (step S 243). Then, if updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step S243; NO), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S243; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S244). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
Updating of the notification timer is permitted if the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one of the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104, and the error monitoring target When the winning opening switch of is the other right large winning opening switch 104, it is not permitted. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently as the fraudulent notification about the variable winning device 35, and prevents time-up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two left big winning opening switch 103 and the right big winning opening switch 104 for the big winning opening (variation winning device 35), when the timer is updated with both switches, the double timer updating is performed. As a result, the fraud timer will time out in half of the specified time, so the timer is updated only at the timing of the one left big winning opening switch 103 which performs monitoring processing later. It is
When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one winning opening switch, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S245), and when the value is not 0 (step S245; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S245; YES), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S246) and set the fraud recovery flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S45). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; YES), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S249) The prepared injustice flag is compared with the value of the target injustice flag area (step S250). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S248; NO), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S250).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S50; YES), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S250; NO), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S251), and the command setting process is performed (step S251). Step S252), the fraud & prize monitoring process ends.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (step S216) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and the winning number counter update processing (step S241) in the fraud & prize monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S261).
Here, the information defined in the winning table in the winning opening monitor table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is as follows.
・ Repetition count ・ Data to judge whether there is input (monitoring switch bit) (defined for each switch)
· Lower address of winning number counter area 1 (defined for each switch)
· Lower address of winning number counter area 2 (defined for each switch)
Next, it is checked whether there is an input (more exactly, a change in the input) of the detection signal from the winning opening switch to be monitored (step S262). Here, when it is determined that there is no input (S262; NO), the process jumps to step S271. When it is determined that there is an input (S262; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded in the next step S263. .

In the next step S264, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked in the subsequent step S265 whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S265; NO), the process proceeds to step S266 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area 1, and then the process proceeds to step S267.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S265 that a counter overflow has occurred (S265; YES), step S266 is skipped and the process jumps to step S267.
Note that the maximum number of memories (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the winning number counter area provided, so if it is exceeded, the value returns to "0" You will lose a lot of prize balls information to pay. In order to avoid that, in step S 264, the contents of the area are not updated immediately, and it is determined that (+1) outside the area is checked whether it becomes “0” before performing the update.
In this way, the process of the first half (definition will be described later) is performed, and the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated.

Here, the process from step S263 to step S266 (hereinafter, referred to as the first half) is to update a counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission). The counter size in the first half is 2 bytes, and the range of 0 to 65535 is the maximum storage number.
On the other hand, the processing from step S267 to step S270 (hereinafter referred to as the second half) to be described later is to update the counter for the main winning ball signal. The counter size in the second half is 1 byte, and the range of 0 to 255 is the maximum storage number.

Returning to the flow, after passing through step S277, next, the processing from step S267 to step S270 (that is, the processing of the second half) is performed. First, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 267).
Next, proceeding to the next step S268, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked at the subsequent step S269 whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S269; NO), the process proceeds to step S270, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2, and then the process proceeds to step S271.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S269 that a counter overflow has occurred (S269; YES), step S270 is skipped and the process jumps to step S271.
In this way, the latter half is processed and the counters for the main prize ball signal are updated.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S262 that there is no input (accurately, change in the input) of a detection signal from the winning opening switch to be monitored (S262; NO), or counter overflow occurs in step S269 ( When it is determined that S269; YES), the process proceeds to step S272, and in step S272, it is determined whether the monitoring process of all the switches is ended, and when it is ended (step S272; YES), the number of inputs End the counter update process. On the other hand, if it has not ended (step S272; NO), the process returns to step S262 to repeat the above processing. According to the above-described process, a prize ball corresponding to a prize is set by the prize number counter area 1 and data for generating a main prize ball signal is set by the prize number counter area 2.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
Next, a gaming machine state check process (steps S219, S221 and S224) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gaming machine status check process, first, a plurality of switches for monitoring the gaming machine status and a status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the signals is to be the target of the current surveillance The state monitoring table to be acquired is acquired (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is as follows.
(A) Lower address of start address of status monitoring area (B) Lower address of port input status area of switch control area where target signal information is stored Mask data to extract only bits of target signal (C) ) Judgment data on signal (e) Status off command (In case of error system, meaning of command of error notification end)
(F) Status on command (In the case of an error system, the meaning of the command to start error notification)
(G) Status off monitoring timer comparison value (h) Status on monitoring timer comparison value

Next, the status of the target signal acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether there is a change in the gaming machine status (step S282).
If the signal is not on (step S 282: NO), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S 283).
Here, the state off flag prepared in step S 283 will be described. The state indicated by the state off flag indicates a non-error (normal) state regarding an error system. On the other hand, with regard to the touch switch as the state indicated by the state off flag, it is the state not being touched.
Next, the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S284). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S285), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S289).
On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step S282: YES), there is a possibility that an error will occur, and a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S286). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine state monitoring table, in the case of out of shoot ball, there is no game ball in the shoot that supplies the game ball to the storage tank with a shoot out of ball switch (not shown). When it is detected and turned on, step S282 becomes YES. If YES, the state on flag is prepared in step S286.
Next, the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S287). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S 288), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S 289).

If the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal match (step S 289; YES), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, it is determined to determine a timer whether or not error treatment is necessary. The status monitoring timer of interest is updated by +1 (step S 292), and it is determined whether the value of the status monitoring timer of interest has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for which it is determined that the treatment for the error is necessary). ).
On the other hand, when the value of the target signal control region and the state of the current signal do not match (step S289; NO), that is, when the state of the signal changes, it is determined that the error treatment is not necessary and the target signal The current signal state is saved in the control area (step S290), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S291), and the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S292). It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293; NO), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the value of the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S293: YES), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step S294). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S295).
Here, when it is determined in step S293 that the target state monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that an error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there are also situations where it is determined that the condition for error occurrence is satisfied again when an error has already occurred, or that the condition for error cancellation is determined again when an error is not occurring. As a result, after step S294, in step S295, the prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area to check whether the error state determined this time is the same as the state of the present error flag. It is like that.

Then, if the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step S 295; YES), it means that the status of the error has not changed, so it is judged that no treatment is necessary, and the game End the machine status check process. Also, when the set status flag and the value of the target status flag area do not match (if the status flag is not the same) (step S29; NO), it means that the status changes to a new error status. The state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S296), and the process proceeds to step S297. That is, the value of the target state flag area is changed to the state of the state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S297. In step S297, rendering command setting processing is performed, and a rendering command corresponding to the gaming machine state determined this time is set.
In step S297, either the state off command prepared in step S284 or the state on command prepared in step S287 is transmitted. As a result, a treatment corresponding to the current state of the gaming machine is performed. For example, if the shooting ball has run out, the gaming machine state display notifying that is notified or released. After step S297, the gaming machine state check process is ended.
In this way, when a change occurs in the gaming machine state, the corresponding state flag is raised to prepare a presentation command for treatment, and when the change in the gaming machine state is eliminated, the corresponding state flag is erased to cancel the presentation command Settings are made. In particular, in the gaming machine state check process, not only the change in the gaming machine state is monitored, but the cancellation is also monitored in common to make the process common.

In addition, such a game machine state check process is the same also about the change of game machine states, such as glass frame opening and front frame opening, for example.
In addition, if the commands for notifying the various gaming machine states (especially, on (occurrence)) are made different depending on the gaming machine state to be monitored, it is effective for the player or the hall personnel. Although there is no need to specify the type of state and there is no problem even if the notification modes are common, common commands may be used.
For example, if a dedicated notification start command is prepared when shooting balls run out, it is possible to notify "No ball in tank!" By voice or a message on the screen. Similarly, if the glass frame is open, it can be reported that "the glass frame is open!".
If a common notification mode is available in which a message is issued by an audio message “Abnormal operation has occurred!” And the frame decoration device 12 is lit in red in the case of shot ball breakage and open glass frame, a common command may be used. It is sufficient to prepare the “abnormal notification start command”, and the processing load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced, and a message is generated depending on the presence or absence of the liquid crystal information display device 451 as in the first embodiment of the present invention and its modification. It can be used in common even between gaming machines that have differences in display capabilities, or even if it is necessary to monitor new types of errors or gaming machine status, the data of the control program of the presentation control device and the voice ROM 327 There is an advantage that there is no need to change.
Note that the types of gaming machine states and errors to which the common “abnormal notification start command” and “abnormal notification end command” are applied are not limited to those described above. It may be a command that can be used as a common notification mode between different gaming machines.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S225) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout busy signal check process, it is determined first whether the payout busy signal is on (step S301). As described above, since the status scan counter is updated by “+1” in the range of 0 to 3, the payout busy signal check process is executed once every four times, and the payout busy signal is monitored in a cycle of 16 ms, for example ( Checked)
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S301; NO), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S302), and then an off determination monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S303). For example, 32 ms is set as the off determination monitoring timer comparison value. After step S303, the process proceeds to step S304.
On the other hand, if the payout busy signal is on in step S301 (step S301; YES), a busy state flag is prepared as the state flag (step S305), and then the on determination timer comparison value is set (step S306). . For example, 32 ms is set as the on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value. After step S306, the process proceeds to step S304.

When the process proceeds from step S303 or step S306 to step S304, in step S304, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal to determine whether they are the same. This is to check whether the same gaming machine state continues for a plurality of interrupts.
The value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal, and if not the same (step S304; NO), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S307). In this case, if the value of the busy signal state area and the state of the current signal are not the same, it means that the state of the busy signal has changed, for example, a change from idle state to busy state or There is a change in
Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to "0". This is to prepare for the next change of the busy signal. Next, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S309).
On the other hand, in step S304, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal. Step S309).

After step S309, it is then determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for which it is determined that an error should be dealt with) (step S310).
Here, when it is determined in step S309 that the busy signal monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the state of the busy signal is determined. However, there is also a possibility that the state of the busy signal is determined when the state of the busy signal has already changed, or the state of the busy signal is determined when the busy signal has not changed, as described later. In step S311, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1. In step S312, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area.
If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S3103; NO), the payout busy signal check process is ended.
In addition, when the value of the busy signal monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S310: YES), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S311). The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S312). After step S312, the payout busy signal check process ends.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
Next, details of the remaining ball monitoring process (step S68) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the remaining ball monitoring process, it is monitored whether the game ball that has won the fluctuation winning device 35 escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 to the outside and remains in the fluctuation winning device 35 or not. is there.
In the residual ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left residual ball outlet switch 112 (step S321). The left residual ball outlet switch 112 detects a game ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 in the variable winning device 35, and has a function to detect whether the ball that has flowed into the hell inflow space 63 remains. doing. Therefore, the presence of input to the left residual ball outlet switch 112 is detected when the game ball is discharged from the hell inflow space 63 to the outside and the left residual ball outlet switch 112 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. In this state, the game control device 100 has an input of a signal.
That is, the left residual ball discharge port switch 112 detects that the game ball is discharged from the hell inflow space 63 to the outside.

If it is determined that there is an input to the left residual ball outlet switch 112 (step S321; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” if the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S322). The remaining ball counter is used to count the number of gaming balls that have flowed into the fluctuation winning device 35 when they remain inside the fluctuation winning device 35.
Note that, by repeating this routine, the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining ball counter becomes “0”. Then, including the input monitoring of detection signals from the left residual ball outlet switch 112 and the right residual ball outlet switch 113 described later, if the residual ball counter becomes “0”, the residual ball in the fluctuation winning device 35 There will be no condition.
Here, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are released by the establishment of the start condition and the gaming ball flows into the fluctuation winning device 35, the inflowing gaming ball is the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening Since it is always detected by any of the switches 104, the game control apparatus 100 has an input of a detection signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104, and then the left residual ball outlet switch 112 Alternatively, if it is not detected by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 that the game ball is discharged from the fluctuation winning device 35, it can be determined that the remaining ball remains inside the fluctuation winning device 35. The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls (remaining balls) remaining inside the variable winning device 35 according to the theory as described above. Therefore, when the remaining ball counter becomes 0, the remaining balls do not stay inside the fluctuation winning device 35.

After step S322, the process proceeds to step S323. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no input to the left residual ball outlet switch 112 (step S321; NO), the residual ball counter is not updated by “−1”, and the process jumps to step S323.
When the process proceeds to step S323, it is determined whether there is an input to the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 (step S323). The right remaining ball outlet switch 113 is disposed under the heavenly prize device 66 (see FIG. 7) of the heaven inflow space 62 in the fluctuation winning device 35, and detects that the ball has come out of the fluctuation winning device 35. It has a function to detect whether or not the sphere which has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 remains. Therefore, the presence of an input to the right residual ball outlet switch 113 is detected when the gaming ball is discharged from the heaven inlet space 62 to the outside and the right residual ball outlet switch 113 detects the discharge and the signal is turned on. In this state, the game control device 100 has an input of a signal.
That is, the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects that the game ball is discharged from the heaven inflow space 62 to the outside.

If it is determined that the right remaining ball outlet switch 113 is present (step S323; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” if the remaining ball counter is not “0” (step S324). As described above, the remaining ball counter is repeatedly updated by “−1”, and the remaining ball counter is “0” by monitoring the detection signal from the left remaining ball outlet switch 112 and the right remaining ball outlet switch 113. If it becomes, there will be no remaining balls inside the fluctuation winning device 35.
After step S324, the process proceeds to step S325. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right remaining ball outlet switch 113 (step S323; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “−1”, and the process jumps to step S325.
Next, in step S325, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left big winning opening switch 103. The left big winning opening switch 103 detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the left big winning opening switch 103 has a function of detecting that the game ball flows into the variable winning device 35. If it is determined that the left large winning opening switch 103 is present (step S325; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by "+1" (step S326). This is because it is detected that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35 by the left big winning opening switch 103, so to count with the remaining ball counter, with the game ball remaining inside the variable winning device 35 as the remaining ball. The remaining ball counter is incremented by "+1".

After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S325; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S327.
Next, in step S327, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104. Similarly, the right big winning opening switch 104 also detects a game ball flowing into the variable winning device 35. Therefore, the right special winning opening switch 104 has a function of detecting the inflow of gaming balls into the variable winning device 35. If it is determined that there is an input to the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S 327; YES), the remaining ball counter is updated by “+1” (step S 328). This is because it is detected that the game ball has flowed into the variable winning device 35 by the right large winning opening switch 104, so to count with the remaining ball counter the game ball remaining inside the variable winning device 35 as the remaining ball The remaining ball counter is incremented by "+1".

After step S328, the process proceeds to step S329. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no input to the right special winning opening switch 104 (step S327; NO), the remaining ball counter is not updated by “+1”, and the process jumps to step S329.
Next, in step S329, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is "0". This is because the remaining ball counter is updated by “−1” until the remaining ball counter becomes “0” as described later by repeating this routine, so the remaining ball counter is “0”, that is, It is determined whether or not there is no remaining ball inside the fluctuation winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S329; NO), it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step S330). The remaining ball error is a state in which an error that the remaining ball remains inside the fluctuation winning device 35 has occurred.
The processing of step S330 is performed because if there is a possibility that a remaining ball error has occurred when the remaining ball counter is not initially "0" in step S329, the process proceeds to step S330 to execute the previous routine. It is determined whether or not a residual ball error has already occurred by then.
Then, if a residual ball error is occurring (step S330; YES), it is determined that a residual ball error has already occurred by the previous routine, and the routine is ended and returns. At this time, this routine is repeated, and the determination in step S329 is repeated until the determination is YES, and when the determination in step S329 is YES, the process branches to step S337.

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step S330; NO), the remaining ball counter is not first set to "0" and there is a possibility that the remaining ball error has occurred, so the process proceeds to step S331. At step S331, the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by "-1". This is because the game balls playing a game inside the variable winning device 35 are normally discharged from the variable winning device 35 within a predetermined period, but for example, some members and the inside of the variable winning device 35 Since there is a possibility that the game ball rarely stays in a situation where one or a plurality of game balls are in contact and sandwiched between wall surfaces, etc., the remaining ball monitoring timer measures the lapse of a predetermined period. For example, when the remaining ball counter is not "0", the present routine is repeated, and even if the remaining ball monitoring timer measures the lapse of a predetermined period, the remaining ball counter still remains not "0". If there is, it will be judged that there are remaining balls.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer has become "0" (step S332), and if the remaining ball monitoring timer has not become "0" (step S332; NO), the process returns and repeats this routine. . Then, if the remaining ball monitoring timer becomes “0” (step S332; YES), it is determined that a remaining ball error has occurred, and a remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S333), along with the remaining ball. An error generation command is prepared (step S334). After step S334, the process proceeds to step S335.
On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S329; YES), it is determined that the remaining ball is lost, and the process jumps to step S336 to prepare a remaining ball error cancellation flag (step S336). An error cancellation command is prepared (step S337). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S335.

Next, proceeding to step S335, it is determined whether the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining ball error flag area. If the prepared state flag is the same as the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S335; YES), it is judged that the state flag has not changed from the previous state flag, and the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the prepared state flag is not the same as the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S335; NO), it is judged that the present state flag has changed from the previous time, and the prepared state flag is the remaining ball error flag area. At the same time, the effect command setting process is performed (step S339). By the effect command setting process, the residual ball error occurrence command set in step S334 described above and the residual ball error release command set in step S337 are sent to the effect control device 200. After step S339, the routine ends and returns.

  Thus, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are released by the establishment of the start condition and the gaming ball flows into the variable winning device 35, the inflowing gaming ball is the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning combination After the game control apparatus 100 receives an input of a detection signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104 while being detected by any of the mouth switches 104, the left residual ball outlet opening switch 112 is then performed. Or if it is not detected that the game ball is discharged from the fluctuation winning device 35 by the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113, it is judged that the remaining ball remains inside the fluctuation winning device 35, and the remaining ball error generation command is When being sent to the effect control device 200, as shown in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), the special figure game is not played during the error operation. . In addition, when the remaining ball disappears and the remaining ball error cancellation command is sent to the effect control device 200, the game (special figure game) is resumed.

[Game stop error processing]
Next, the details of the game stop error process (step S69) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the game stop error process, first, it is determined whether or not an error release is waiting (step S351). If it is not waiting for error release (step S351; NO), it is determined whether or not an error operation is in progress (step S352). If the error operation is not in progress (step S352; NO), it is determined that there is no error operation, the routine is ended, and the process returns. Therefore, if the user is not waiting for the release of the error and is not in the error operation, the game will be continued since no error occurs.
On the other hand, if an error operation is in progress (step S352; YES), the game stop error control timer is updated by “−1” (step S353). Then, it is determined whether the game stop error control timer has become "0" (step S354). The game stop error control timer is for counting the fixed period for stopping the game for a fixed period when an error occurs in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1).

Then, if the game stop error control timer is not "0" (step S354; NO), the process returns and repeats the routine. Then, when the game stop error control timer becomes "0" (step S354; YES), an error release waiting flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step S355). Next, a game stop error cancellation command is prepared (step S356), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S357). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error cancellation command prepared in step S356 described above is sent to the effect control device 200. After step S357, the routine ends and returns.
On the other hand, if the release of the error is awaited (step S351; YES), the process branches to step S358. Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358). This is to determine whether the RAM initialization switch 127 has been operated to clear the error.
If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S 358; NO), the routine ends and returns. If there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 127 (step S358; YES), a game stop error cancellation command is prepared (step S359), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S360). By the effect command setting process, the game stop error cancellation command prepared in step S359 described above is sent to the effect control device 200.

Next, the cancellation flag is saved in the abnormal discharge flag area (step S361), and the abnormal discharge counter area is cleared to "0" (step S362). The abnormal discharge is an abnormality such that a larger number of gaming balls than the number of gaming balls having flowed into the fluctuation winning device 35 are discharged from the fluctuation winning device 35. That is, it is not the flow that has flowed in the regular route, but (with the glass frame 4 opened), the illegal discharge of putting the game ball directly from the front of the heaven flow-in space 62 or the hell flow-in space 63 etc. In order to perform the monitoring, an abnormal discharge counter area, a flag under cancellation regarding abnormal discharge, and the like are provided. Therefore, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, saving of the releasing flag related to abnormal discharge and clearing of the abnormal discharge counter area to "0" are performed, and it is prepared for the next game stop error.
Next, the releasing flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region (step S363), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer region is cleared to "0" (step S364). Magnet fraud is detected by the magnetic sensor 115, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, saving of the release flag regarding magnet fraud or clearing "0" of the magnet fraud monitoring timer area is performed, causing a game stop error due to the next magnet fraud. Be equipped.
Next, the cancellation flag is saved in the vibration invalid flag area (step S365), and the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area is cleared to "0" (step S366). Vibration fraud is detected by, for example, the vibration sensor 116. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, saving of the cancellation flag related to vibration irregularity or clearing of "0" of the vibration irregularity monitoring invalid timer area is performed, and the game stop error associated with the next vibration irregularity is made. Be prepared for

Next, the cancellation flag is saved in the radio wave improper flag area (step S367), and the normal operation flag is saved in the game stop error flag area (step S368). The radio wave fraud is detected by the board radio wave sensor 114, for example. As a result, when the RAM initialization switch 127 is operated, saving of the in-cancel flag and the saving of the in-normal flag relating to the radio wave improperness are performed, and the game stop error due to the next radio wave irregularity is prepared. After step S368, the routine ends and returns.
As described above, in the game stop error processing, when there is an error (such as radio wave fraud, magnet fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge, or other malicious thing) that causes the game to be suspended, the game is suspended while the error is cancelled. In order to do so, it is monitored whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 127 and the error cancellation flag is saved to prepare for the next error.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special view game process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the special view game process, monitoring the input of the left start opening switch 105, the right start opening switch 106, the middle start opening switch 107, the left large winning opening switch 103, the right large winning opening switch 104, the specific area switch 111, the effect switch 108 And control of the whole process regarding a special figure change game etc., setting of a display of a special figure is performed.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special view game process, first, the starting opening switch monitoring process is performed (step S371). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, winnings on the left starting opening switch 105, the right starting opening switch 106, and the middle starting opening switch 107 are monitored, and when there is a starting winning for the game ball to these, extraction of special symbol random numbers is performed. A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at a stage before the start of the special figure variation game based on the winning.
Subsequently, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of the game ball with the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 provided in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
Next, a specific area switch monitoring process (step S373) is performed. In this specific area switch monitoring process, the game ball is monitored for winning in the specific area switch 111 provided in the heavenly prize apparatus 66 of the variable winning device 35, and processing for setting a rendering command is performed.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the effect switch 108 (step S 374). The presentation switch 108 is disposed in the space immediately before the gaming ball enters the heavenly prize apparatus 66 in the variable winning device 35, and when the gaming ball passes the presentation switch 108, the V of the heaven rotator 67 of the heavenly prize apparatus 66 The inflow effect of the heavenly prize device 66 for making the player expect the ball to fit in the winning recesses 68a and 68b is performed. Therefore, in step S 374, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the effect switch 108 and the detection signal has been input to the game control apparatus 100.
If there is an input on the effect switch 108 (step S 374; YES), an effect switch passing command is prepared (step S 375), and then an effect command setting process is performed (step S 376). As a result, when the game ball passes the effect switch 108, an effect command is sent to the effect control device 200, and the information display unit 45 displays various game states. In addition, the panel decoration device 351 and the frame decoration device 12 are also controlled by the effect command being sent to the effect control device 200.

After step S376, the process proceeds to step S377. On the other hand, if there is no input to the effect switch 108 (step S374; NO), the process jumps to step S377.
If it progresses to step S377, a special figure game processing timer will be updated by "-1" if it is not "0". In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step S378). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step S378; YES), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step S379), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S380). Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game process number (step S381).

If it is determined in step S381 that the special figure game processing number is "0", power on operation processing is performed (step S382). In the power-on operation process, the game can be started by performing processing such as returning the character motor 81 in the first character device 51 and the character motor 72 in the heaven character device 66 to their initial positions upon power-on. Do something to
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “1”, the variation start of the special figure variation game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation game and the setting of the effect, the special figure variation processing A special view routine processing (step S383) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
In step S 381, when the special figure game process number is “2”, the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step S384) is performed.

In step S 381, when the special figure game process number is “3”, the special figure display process (S3) that performs setting of information necessary for performing the small hit opening operation corresponding to the game result of the special figure variation game ( Step S385) is performed.
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “4”, a small hit open process (step S 386) is executed to execute the setting process related to the large winning opening opening in the small hit.
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “5”, the remaining winning balls in the big winning opening (pointing to the variable winning device 35. The same applies hereinafter) are discharged during the small hit middle processing. A small hit remaining ball process (step S387) is performed to set a time for setting the information, set information necessary to perform the small hit end process, and the like.
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “6”, the small hit ending process (step S 388) is performed to set the information necessary for ending the small hit and performing the fanfare / interval process. .
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, it is necessary to perform processing related to fanfare / interval such as setting of the special winning opening open time value corresponding to the opening information of the special winning opening and the number of rounds. A fanfare / interval process (step S 389) is performed to execute setting of the information.

In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “8”, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing for setting the ending command and the big hit end processing are performed in the final round The special winning opening open process (step S390) is performed to set information necessary for the game.
In step S 381, when the special figure game processing number is “9”, a process for forcibly ending a period (big winning hole remaining ball processing period) for waiting for the remaining balls in the special winning opening to be discharged, Then, the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step S391) is performed to set information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing.
If the special figure game process number is "10" in step S381, a big hit end process (step S392) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

Thereafter, after preparing a table (Special figure 1 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 in the collective display device 50 (step S393), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special view 1 of the collective display device 50 ( Step S394) is performed. Then, after preparing a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the collective display device 50 (step S395), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special view 2 of the collective display device 50 ( Step S396) is performed. Next, a stopper solenoid control process is performed (step S397), and the special figure game process is ended. The stopper solenoid control process controls the accessory sonoy 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 up and down, and information advantageous to the player by lamp notification etc. (the game ball plays the first role) The bat member 53 is driven upward to cause the bridge main body 80 of the object device 51 to roll into the hell inflow space 63, and information to teach the timing of blocking etc. is performed.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" in step S378 (step S378; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step S393 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

Here, the small winning is the big winning opening (variation winning device 35) when winning in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b, all the starting winning opening of the second starting winning opening 34) The game balls pass the special winning area 69 from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 to the V prize, and the operation until the lottery for the big hit is performed. However, if there is no V prize, it will be up to the prize winning on the big prize winning opening (the variable winning device 35).
Therefore, the (lottery) results of the special figure variation display game are all small hits. Per 3R, 7R is not a small hit, but indicates the type in the big hit.
Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation game (V winning, ie passage of the game ball to the specific winning area 69), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs. It means that the specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 35 as a special motorized part continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S371) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 29, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the left starting opening (first starting winning opening 33a) a prize monitoring table is prepared (step S401), and hard random number acquisition processing (step S402) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first start winning opening 33a (step S403).
If it is determined in step S403 that there is no winning on the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; NO), the process proceeds to step S405, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S403 that there is a winning on the first start winning opening 33a (step S403; YES), the special view 1 start port switch process is performed (step S404). Special figure 1 starting mouth switch processing is something which does the processing which relates to the starting winning a prize such as extraction of the special figure design random number with the winning a prize of the game ball to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 33a. After step S404, the process proceeds to step S405.
In addition, since the so-called common power and general drawing are not provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, general power support is not present for the start winning.

If it progresses to step S405, the process similar to the process which monitors the prize-winning to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 33a mentioned above will be sequentially performed about the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 33b (right starting mouth).
That is, the right starting opening (first starting winning opening 33b) a prize monitoring table is prepared (step S405), and hard random number acquisition processing (step S406) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning for the first starting winning opening 33b. Is determined (step S407).
If it is determined in step S407 that there is no winning on the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; NO), the process proceeds to step S409, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S407 that there is a winning on the first start winning opening 33b (step S407; YES), the special view 1 start port switch process is performed (step S408). The special view 1 start port switch process is the same process as step S404 described above. After step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

If it progresses to step S409, the process similar to the process which monitors the prize-winning to the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 33a mentioned above will be sequentially performed about the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 34 (medium starting mouth).
In other words, prepare a medium starting opening (second starting winning opening 34) prize monitoring table (step S409), do hard random number acquisition processing (step S410), whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening 34 Is determined (step S411).
If it is determined in step S411 that there is no winning on the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; NO), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S411 that there is a winning on the second start winning opening 34 (step S411; YES), the special view 2 start opening switch process is performed (step S412). The special figure 2 starting opening switch processing is to carry out processing related to starting winning such as extraction of a special figure symbol random number along with winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 34. After step S412, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps S402, S406, and S410) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, the first start winning opening (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening (middle starting opening) 34 are monitored. The start no prize information of the starting opening is set (step S421), and it is determined whether there is an input in the starting opening switch to be monitored among the first starting winning openings 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34 ( Step S422). Then, when there is no input on the start port switch to be monitored (step A422; NO), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step S422; YES), the random number latch register status is read (step S423), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424) .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; NO), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S424; YES), the extracted variation pattern random number is loaded into the monitoring target hard random number latch register and prepared (step S425). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how to display the special figure variation on the batch display device 50. Next, the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting winning openings 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34 is set (step S426), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 start port switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 start port switch process (steps S404 and S408) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. Special figure 1 starting mouth switch processing, when there is input to 1st starting winning a prize mouth (the left starting mouth and the right starting mouth) 33a and 33b, it is the processing which is done commonly concerning each input.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special view 1 starting opening switch passing process, first, the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the first starting winning opening (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a, 33b. The number of times of starting port 1 signal output which is the number of times of outputting information regarding the parameter to the external management apparatus of the pachinko machine 1 is loaded (step S431), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S432). Is judged whether it overflows (step S433).
If the output number does not overflow (step S433; NO), the updated value is saved in the start opening 1 signal output number area of the RWM (step S434), and the process proceeds to step S435. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step S433; YES), the process proceeds to step S435.
In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening 1 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by “+1” updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows. Therefore, if it is determined that the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number of times of output overflows, and therefore, it is not saved.

If it progresses to step S435, it will be determined whether it is processing normally, and if it is not processing normally (step S435; NO), the special figure 1 starting opening switch processing is complete | finished. During normal processing, monitor the change start of the special figure change game, and set the change start of the special figure change game and the setting of the effect, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure change processing, customer waiting effect, etc. It is carried out.
On the other hand, if normal processing is in progress (step S 435; YES), it is determined whether there is a hold on the special view 2 (step S 436).
Here, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening), the suspension of the special view (the suspension of the special view 2) is performed for only one. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the suspension of the special figure (without the suspension of special figure 1) is not performed. And, only for the special figure 2, the reserved display of the special figure is performed only for one.

If there is a hold in the special view 2 (step S 436; YES), the special view 1 start port switch processing ends. On the other hand, if there is no suspension in the special drawing 2 (step S436; NO), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S437). The remaining ball counter is used to count the number of gaming balls that have flowed into the fluctuation winning device 35 when they remain inside the fluctuation winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S437; NO), the special view 1 start port switch process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S437; YES), it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 starting opening winning flag (step S438). Special figure 1 starting mouth winning a prize flag, if it wins in either one starting winning a prize mouth among the 1st starting winning a prize mouth (the left starting mouth and the right starting mouth) 33a and 33b, it is set (is raised). The special drawing 1 starting opening winning flag is determined in step S 438, the special drawing 1 starting opening winning flag is the first starting winning opening (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33 a, any one of the starting openings 33 b This is to determine whether the game ball has already won a prize in the winning opening.

If there is a special figure 1 starting opening winning flag (step S438; YES), the game ball has already won a winning opening in one of the first starting winning openings (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a, 33b. It is determined that the special view 1 start opening winning flag is set, and there is no need to set the special view 1 start opening winning flag again, so the special view 1 start opening switch process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 starting opening winning flag (step S438; NO), it is necessary to set the special figure 1 starting opening winning flag with the current starting winning, so the process proceeds to step S439 and special drawing 1 starting Set a mouth winning flag.
Next, the variation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the special figure 1 variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step S440). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how to display the special figure variation on the batch display device 50. Next, the special symbol random number is extracted (step S441), and the extracted special symbol random number is saved in the special figure 1 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S442). After passing through step S442, the special view 1 start port switch process ends.

[Special figure 2 start mouth switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 start port switch process (step S412) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. Special figure 2 starting mouth switch processing is the processing which is done when there is an input to 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 34 (the 2nd starting mouth).

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special view 2 start opening switch passing process, first, information about the number of winnings on the start opening switch to be monitored among the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening) is pachinko machine Load the start port 2 signal output count that is the number of outputs to the external management device of 1 (step S 451), update the loaded value by “+1” (step S 452) and see if the output count overflows It determines (step S453).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S453; NO), the updated value is saved in the start opening 2 signal output number area of RWM (step S454), and the process proceeds to step S455. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step S453; YES), the process proceeds to step S455.
In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening 2 signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by “+1” updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows. Therefore, if it is determined that the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number of times of output overflows, and therefore, it is not saved.

If it progresses to step S455, it will be determined whether the number of special figure 2 pendings is less than the upper limit. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the special view 2 is configured so that the suspension display of the special view is performed only for one, so the upper limit value of the special view 2 suspension number is 1.
When the special figure reservation number is not less than the upper limit value (step S455; NO), the special figure 2 start port switch common process is ended.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 pending number is less than the upper limit (step S455; YES), the special figure 2 pending number to be updated is updated by "+1" (step S456) and corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number. A decoration hold number command is prepared (step S457). The decoration suspension number is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 displays the suspension number of the special view 2 as the decoration suspension number. In this case, there can only be a decoration hold number command of hold number = 1. In addition, by the light emission aspect of the light emission member (LED etc.) for decoration provided in the decoration member (the member for decoration arrange | positioned around the 2nd start winning opening 34) which comprises the 2nd start winning opening 34, It may be notified that there is a special figure 2 reservation number.
Next, an effect command setting process is performed (step S458). As a result, the decoration hold number command is sent to the effect control device 300 and the information display 45 displays the hold number of the special view 2 as the decoration hold number.

  Next, the variation pattern random number prepared in step S425 in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the special figure 2 variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step S459). The variation pattern random number is a random number that determines how to display the special figure variation on the batch display device 50. Next, the special symbol symbol random number is extracted (step S460), and the extracted special symbol symbol random number is saved in the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S461). After passing through step S461, the special view 2 start port switch process ends.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S372) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S471). The left big winning opening switch 103 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43a in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure. If there is an input on the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S471; YES), the process proceeds to step S472 to perform a special winning opening count update process. The special winning opening count is to count the gaming balls having flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the special winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened. Therefore, if there is an input on the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S 471; YES), the special winning opening count is updated by “+1”. After step S472, the process proceeds to step S473. On the other hand, if there is no input on the left special winning opening switch 103 (step S471; NO), the process jumps to step S473.

When the process proceeds to step S 473, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the right special winning opening switch 104. The right large winning opening switch 104 is disposed in the space near the base end of the movable member 43b in the variable winning device 35, and detects gaming balls flowing into the first feature device 51 of the seesaw structure. If there is an input on the right large winning opening switch 104 (step S 473; YES), the process proceeds to step S 474 to perform a special winning opening count update process. Therefore, if there is an input on the right special winning opening switch 104 (step S 473; YES), the special winning opening count is updated by “+1”. After passing through step S474, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is no input on the right special winning opening switch 104 (step S 473; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.

[Large winning a prize opening count renewal processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening count update processing (steps S 472 and S 474) in the special winning opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 34, in the special winning opening count update process, first, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the special winning opening) is Load the number-of-combinations prize number signal output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings on the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 to be counted is output to the external management device of the pachinko machine 1 Step S481) Update the loaded value by "+1" (step S482). Next, it is determined whether the number-of-combinations prize-number-of-times signal output overflows (step S473).
If the number-of-combinations winning combination signal output count does not overflow (step S483; NO), the updated value is saved in the combination number-of-combination winnings signal output count area of RWM (step S484), and the process proceeds to step S485 . On the other hand, when the number-of-combinations prize-number-of-times signal output count overflows (step S483; YES), the process proceeds to step S485.
In the present embodiment, the value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the number-of-combinations prize-number-of-times signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by updating “+1”, and it is determined that the number-of-combinations prize number signal output overflows. Therefore, if it is determined that the value loaded by looping becomes "0", it is determined that the number-of-combinations prize-number-of-times signal output overflows, so that saving is not performed.

If it progresses to step S485, it will be determined whether the opening process of the fluctuation winning combination apparatus 35 as a big winning opening is under processing. This is to determine whether or not the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 as the special winning opening are open and the processing is easy to receive the game ball.
In the present embodiment, since the variable winning device 35 corresponds to a so-called large winning opening, the variable winning device 35 is referred to as a large winning opening, and the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are open. It is appropriately referred to as "medium".
If the special winning opening is not open (step S485; NO), the processing proceeds to step S486. If the special winning opening is opening (step S485; YES), the processing jumps to step S489. If it progresses to step S486, it will be determined whether it is in a big winning opening (variation winning device 35) remaining ball processing. This monitors whether the game ball that has won the fluctuation winning device 35 as a big winning opening escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 to the outside and remains in the fluctuation winning device 35 or not. It is determined whether the process is being performed.
If it is not in the special winning opening residual ball processing (step S486; NO), it proceeds to step S487, and if the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step S486; YES), it jumps to step S489.

In step S487, it is determined whether small hit open processing is being performed. This is because, when the game ball is supported by being fitted into the V prize concave portions 68a and 68b formed on the heaven rotary body 67 of the heavenly prize product device 66 in the big prize winning opening (the variable prize winning device 35) and falls into the special prize region 69, According to the lottery result of the big hit will be a big hit (16R big hit, per 7R or 3R), but here the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 33a, 33b, second starting winning opening 34 of all starting winning openings Determine whether the movable members 43a and 43b in the big winning opening (the variable winning device 35) open in a small hit and are processes that are easy to accept the game ball in the start game by the small hit with the win) It is
If the small hit opening process is not in progress (step S487; NO), the process proceeds to step S488. If the small hit opening process is in progress (step S487; YES), the process jumps to step S489.

If it progresses to step S488, it will be determined whether small hit residual ball processing is in progress. This is a small hit occurs, when the starting game is being performed, the game ball that has won the large winning opening (the variable winning device 35) escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 to the outside It is determined whether the process of monitoring whether or not the variable winning device 35 remains inside is being processed.
If the small hit residual ball processing is not underway (step S487; NO), the special winning opening count update processing is ended. On the other hand, if the small hit residual ball processing is being performed (step S487; YES), the process proceeds to step S489.
In step S489, a special winning opening count command is prepared. This is the left special winning opening switch 103 for counting gaming balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 (that is, the special winning opening) when the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 as a special winning opening are opened and A command for outputting information on the number of winnings on the right large winning opening switch 104 to the effect control device 300 is prepared. Next, an effect command setting process is performed (step S490). As a result, the command prepared in step S489 is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 controls the information display 45 to display the number of winning game balls for the big winning opening etc. Will be displayed.

After passing through step S490, it is then determined whether or not the special winning opening (the variable winning device 35) is being opened (step S491). If the special winning opening opening process is not being performed (step S 491; NO), the process proceeds to step S 492. If the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step S 491; YES), the process branches to step S 493.
If it progresses to step S492, it will be determined whether small hit open processing is in progress. If the small hit opening process is not in progress (step S492: NO), the large winning opening count update process is ended. On the other hand, if the small hit opening process is being performed (step S492: YES), the process proceeds to step S493.
In step S493, the special winning opening count is updated by "+1". Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step S494).
If the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step S494; NO), the process jumps to the process of step S498. When the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step S494; YES), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit, and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to "0" (step S495), the process proceeds to step S496.

At step S496, the upper limit value is loaded from the upper limit processing area of the middle processing control pointer for the special view, and the value loaded in the middle processing control pointer area for the special view is saved (step S497). After passing through step S497, the special winning opening count update process ends.
Here, the process of step S497 is performed when the large winning opening count number becomes the upper limit value. Opening and closing operations of the large winning opening during the round (that is, opening and closing operations of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35) The value of the processing control pointer during special control during control is rewritten to the upper limit value at which the operation ends, for example, in order to forcibly end the opening / closing operation up to 18 times in the middle (refer to FIG. See “small hit timing chart” shown in 46 and “big hit timing chart” shown in FIG. 52).
As the upper limit value, "any one of 0, 2, 54" is set according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Immediately after the timer clear in step S495, processing for closing the special winning opening is performed (after returning to the special figure game processing).
On the other hand, when the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit value in step S494 (step S494; NO), the process jumps to the processing of step S498, and in step S498 the special winning opening (fluctuating winning device 35) opening process Determine if there is. If the special winning opening opening process is not in progress (step S 498; NO), the special winning opening count updating process is ended. If the special winning opening is being processed (step S 498; YES), the processing proceeds to step S 499 and the special winning opening count is the same as the number of stopper solenoid operations changed (for example, the number of stopper solenoid operations changed = 5). It is determined whether the
In the stopper solenoid control process, control of the product sorenoi 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first product apparatus 51 up and down is performed, and information advantageous to the player by lamp notification etc. (the game ball is the first (1) The bat member 53 is driven upward to cause the bridge main body 80 of the role-effect apparatus 51 to roll and flow into the hell inflow space 63, and a process to render the information to teach the timing of blocking etc. is performed The number of change of the operation of the stopper solenoid is the number of change of the stopper solenoid operation. Then, when the special winning opening count number reaches a specific value, the stopper solenoid operation is changed.

  If the special winning opening count number is not the same as the number of stopper solenoid operation changes (NO in step S499), the special winning opening count update process is ended. On the other hand, if the special winning opening count number is the same as the stopper solenoid operation change number (step S499; YES), the value of the big hit operation second half start is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S500). Next, the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S501). Thereby, when the special winning opening count number reaches a specific value, the stopper solenoid operation is changed, and when the value of the big hit operation second half start elapses, the stopper solenoid control is ended. After passing through step S501, the special winning opening count update process ends.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (step S 373) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 35, in the specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area is valid (step S511). When the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball has passed through the special winning area 69, the specific area switch 111 for detecting the gaming ball having passed the special winning area 69 is disposed inside the fluctuation winning device 35, A big hit is decided as a V prize, and the condition device and the feature continuous operation device will operate.
Even if such a specific area switch 111 is illegally passed through the game ball, it is not recognized as a regular V prize, so the case where the game ball passes the specific area switch 111 only under certain conditions is legal. The conditions for recognizing a V prize are as follows.
The special figure game process number is small hit open processing The special figure game process number is small hit remaining ball process It is determined that the specific area is valid when any of the above processes is executed. Then, when the gaming ball passes the specific area switch 111 while the specific area is valid, it is recognized as a regular V winning.

If the specific area is not valid (step S511; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if the specific area is valid (step S511; YES), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512).
When there is an input to the specific area switch 111, the specific area switch 111 for detecting the gaming ball that has passed the special winning area 69 is disposed in the inside of the variable winning device 35, and When the specific area switch 111 detects that the signal is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 has a detection signal input.
That is, the specific area switch 111 detects that the game ball has passed the special winning area 69.
If there is no input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512; NO), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the specific area switch 111 (step S512; YES), it is determined whether the gaming ball has already passed through the specific area (step S513). If the gaming ball has already passed the specific area (step S513; YES), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not already passed through the specific area (step S513; NO), the passing information is saved in the specific area passing flag area (step S514). Next, a specific area passage command is prepared (step S515), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S516). Thereby, when the game ball passes the special winning area 69 inside the variable winning device 35, the specific area switch 111 detects it and the specific area passing command is prepared and sent to the effect control device 300. The effect of "V" winning being displayed is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (others, the decoration of the panel decoration device 351) is performed, and the player is notified. After passing through step S516, the specific area switch monitoring process is ended.

[Special figure power on operation process]
Next, the details of the special view power on operation process (step S382) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special drawing power on operation process is executed only when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure power on operation process, it is determined first whether the M1 control pointer is in the stop operation (step S521).
In the present embodiment, two of an accessory motor 81 (first motor) and an accessory motor 72 (second motor) are disposed as accessory motors. The accessory motor 81 (first motor) drives the bridge main body 80 in the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure up and down. Further, the accessory motor 72 (second motor) drives the rotation of the heaven rotator 67 in the heaven accessory device 66.
The above-mentioned M1 control pointer is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 81 (first motor). On the other hand, an M2 control pointer described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 72 (second motor).

If the M1 control pointer is the stop operation (step S521; YES), it is then determined whether the M2 control pointer is the stop operation (step S522). If the M2 control pointer is the stop operation (step S522; YES), the process proceeds to step S523.
Here, if the M1 control pointer is the stop operation (step S521; YES) and the M2 control pointer is also the stop operation (step S522; YES), the bonus motor 81 (first motor) and the bonus motor 72 ( It is determined that both of the second motor) are stopped at the initial position. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the normal processing of the special drawing game can be started, and the processing after step S523 is executed.
In the present embodiment, two accessory motors are disposed, which are the accessory motor 81 (first motor) and the accessory motor 72 (second motor). As described above, since the special figure power on operation process is executed only when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is confirmed that the feature motor 81 and the feature motor 72 are in the initial position when the power is on. When it is completed and stopped at the initial position, the normal processing of the special drawing game is started. Therefore, when the determinations in step S521 and step S522 are both YES, it is determined that the confirmation setting that the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 are at the initial position has been completed.
Without such processing, there is a possibility that the progression of the game can be started without the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 at the normal position (initial position). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the special drawing game does not start unless the initial position setting for the accessory motor 81 and the accessory motor 72 is completed, so that there is an advantage that it can be immediately recognized when there is a problem.

Returning to the flow, if the determinations in step S 521 and step S 522 are both YES, the process proceeds to step S 523 to save the value of M 1 normal operation in the M 1 control pointer area (step S 523). 'Clear (step S524).
Then, similarly, the value of the M2 normal operation is saved in the M2 control pointer area (step S525), and the M2 control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S526).
Next, "1" is set as the processing number of the special figure game (step S527). By this, next time, special processing will be shifted to special processing. Then, the number ("1" in this case) set in step S527 is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S528). After step S528, the special figure power on operation process ends.
On the other hand, when the M1 control pointer is not in the stopping operation (step S521; NO) or in the case where the M2 control pointer is not in the stopping operation (step S522; NO), the bonus motor 81 and the bonus motor 72 are not at the initial position. Since the confirmation setting of the position is not completed, in any case, the special view power on operation process is ended. Therefore, in this case, the process does not shift to the special figure processing of the special figure game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure game does not start unless the initial position setting of the product motor 81 and the product motor 72 is completed, and the process for the special drawing routine is not started. The thing motor 81 and the thing motor 72 can be operated, and a stable game can be provided to both the player and the game arcade.
Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory motor 72 controlled by the M2 control pointer rotationally drives the heaven rotary body 67 in the heaven character apparatus 66, and the heaven rotary body 67 has two V prize concave portions 68a and 68b. It is formed. Then, when the ball that has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is fitted into any of the V winning recessed portions 68a and 68b and the ball passes the special winning area 69, a big hit occurs.
In this case, the accessory motor 72 controlled by the M2 control pointer always repeats the same operation during the game. Therefore, except for the initial position detection operation (set at the time of power on), the operation of the accessory motor 72 is set only in the process of step S525.

Not limited to the control as in this embodiment, the heaven rotator 67 in the heavenly prize product device 66 may be controlled to keep rotating constantly (for example, it starts rotating at the same time as the power is turned on, and then rotates constantly). Continue).
In addition, for example, control may be performed to cause a disk-like member that constitutes the heavenly rotating body 67 in the heavenly prize product device 66 to repeat a reciprocating motion in which it tilts to the left and right. In this way, since the heavenly rotating body 67 repeatedly moves back and forth, the movement of the game ball fitting in the V winning recesses 68a and 68b becomes complicated, and the player gets excited and excited. it can.
Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above-described modified example. For example, the feature motor 81 disposed in the first feature device 51 changes the operation according to the progress of the game (that is, the tilt condition of the bridge main body 80 As the motor 81 is driven and changed, the control contents (for example, temporarily reverse rotation or temporary rotation) of the accessory motor 72 disposed in the heavenly prize apparatus 66 as the game progresses. A plurality of control contents may be switched, such as stopping. By doing so, since both the feature motor 81 and the feature motor 72 change the operation in accordance with the progress of the game, the contents of the game become colorful, and the game can be enjoyed more.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine processing (step S383) in the special view game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S531). The remaining ball counter counts the number of game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 35 when they remain inside the variable winning device 35.
If the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S531; YES), it is determined that the start of the normal game can be started immediately because the game ball does not remain inside the variable winning device 35, and it is determined in step S532. It is determined whether there is a special figure 1 starting mouth winning flag. If there is a special figure 1 start opening winning flag (step S532; YES), it is determined that the game ball has won in any of the first start winning openings 33a and 33b, and the start condition of special view 1 is satisfied, and step S538 And the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is performed. Thereby, the variable display game of the special view 1 is started by the collective display device 50. After passing through step S538, the special view normal processing ends.

On the other hand, if there is no special figure 1 starting opening winning flag (step S532; NO), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step S533). This is to determine whether or not there is such a hold since only one is permitted to be held when the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 34. If the special figure 2 holding number is not "0" (step S533; YES), the special figure 2 holding number is updated by "-1" since there is a special figure 2 holding (step S534).
Next, a decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number is prepared (step S535), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S536). As a result, the decoration special drawing reserve number command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display on the decoration special figure is performed as the gaming state on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed (step S537). As a result, the batch display device 50 starts the variable display game of the special view 2. After the step S537, the special figure normal processing ends.

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S531; NO), it is determined that the normal game can not be started immediately because the game ball remains inside the variable winning device 35. Jump to step S539.
Further, even if the special figure 2 reserve number is "0" in step S533 (step S533; NO), it is determined that the game game accompanying the start winning can not be started because the special figure 2 is not retained. Jump to S539.
In step S539, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step S539; NO), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S539) S540).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S541), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S542). As a result, the customer waiting demo command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display concerning the customer waiting demo is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. After step S542, the process proceeds to step S543.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started (step S539; YES), the process jumps to step S543.

In step S543, "1" is set as the process number (step S543), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "1" is saved) (step S544), and then the special figure is routine End the process.
Thus, by performing a check on the number of reserved special views 2 for which suspension is permitted, if the number of reserved special views 2 is not “0”, effect display relating to the decorative special view is performed on the information display 45. , Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S537) will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start storage in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start storage is more than the first special view variation display game It constitutes priority control means to be executed preferentially.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step S538) in the special view normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game.
In the first special view variation display game, when the gaming ball wins the first start winning openings 33a and 33b (first start opening), the special view 1 is displayed among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. It is a variable display game performed by the special view 1 display to be displayed.
As shown in FIG. 38A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S551). 1 special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step S552) according to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information). Subsequently, a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S553), and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step S554).
Next, "2" is set as the process number (step S555), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "2" is saved) (step S556).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S557), and a signal relating to the start of the special view 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S558). As a result, the special figure 1 fluctuating signal is turned on. Next, the flag during fluctuation is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S559), and the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step S560). As a result, the variable display game of the special view 1 is started by the collective display device 50, and the blinking control of the special view 1 is performed.
Next, the special figure 1 starting opening winning flag is cleared (step S561), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step S537) in the special view normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game.
In the second special view variation display game, when the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 34 (second start opening), the special view 2 is displayed among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. It is a variable display game performed by the special view 2 display.
As shown in FIG. 38 (b), first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step S571). 2 special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step S572) according to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Subsequently, a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S573), and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step S574).
Next, "2" is set as the process number (step S575), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "2" is saved) (step S576).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step S577), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special view 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step S578). As a result, the special figure 2 fluctuating signal is turned on. Next, the flag during variation is saved in the special view 2 variation control flag area (step S579), and the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special view 2 blink control timer area (step S580). As a result, the variable display game of the special view 2 is started by the collective display device 50, and the blinking control of the special view 2 is performed. After passing through step S580, the special view 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S552) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is a process related to the setting of the stop symbol (pattern information) of the special figure 1.
As shown in FIG. 39 (a), first, load the random number for determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 symbol random number storage area (step S591). 'Clear (step S592). Next, the small hit symbol table is set (step S593), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S594). By this processing, any symbol number of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 will be selected.

Next, the special figure 1 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S595), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S596). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 1 display for displaying the special view 1 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. Note that once by the collective display device 50. In the special figure variation display game, only one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changed (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 do not change simultaneously), so the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is the special figure Both 1 and 2 are common to the stop symbol pattern area and are the same area (see step S616 described later).
Next, small hit operation determination information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hit operation determination information area (step S597). The small hit operation determination information is information for determining which of the single open or double open small hit operations are to be performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step S598). The special winning opening information is information for determining whether to open the movable members 43a and 43b of the special winning opening (the variable winning device 35) corresponding to which of 16R big hit, 3R, and 7R. .
Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step S599), and the prepared decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S600). The decoration special drawing command prepared in step S599 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special design 1 or special drawing 2 the stop symbol pattern is.
Next, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S601). Thereby, the decoration special drawing command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decoration special drawing command related to the special drawing 1 is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. become. After passing through step S601, the special view 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S572) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
Special figure 2 stop design setting processing is something which does the processing which relates to the setting of the stop design (design information) of special figure 2.
As shown in FIG. 39 (b), first, load the random number for determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2 from the special figure 2 symbol random number storage area (step S611), 'Clear (step S612). Next, the small hit symbol table is set (step S613), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S614). By this processing, any symbol number of 50 symbol numbers from 0 to 49 will be selected.

Next, the special figure 2 small hit stop symbol information table is set (step S615), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S616). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special figure 2 display for displaying the special view 2 among the LED segments in the collective display device 50. Note that once by the collective display device 50. In the special figure variation display game, only one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changed (that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 do not simultaneously change), the area for storing the stop symbol pattern is the special figure Both 1 and 2 are common to the stop symbol pattern area and are the same area (same as step S596 described above).
Next, small hit operation judgment information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the small hit operation judgment information area (step S617). The small hit operation determination information is information for determining a small hit operation of opening twice.

Next, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step S618). The special winning opening information is information for determining whether to open the movable members 43a and 43b of the special winning opening (the variable winning device 35) corresponding to which of 16R big hit, 3R, and 7R. .
Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S619), and the prepared decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step S620). The decoration special drawing command prepared in step S619 is distinguished so that it can be determined which of the special design 1 or special drawing 2 the stop symbol pattern is.
Next, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S621). Thereby, the decoration special drawing command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the decoration special drawing command related to the special drawing 2 is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. become. After passing through step S611, the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps S553 and S573) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The variation pattern setting process is to set a variation pattern which is a variation aspect in the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game.
The fluctuation pattern is not limited to the example as in the present embodiment, and for example, the first half fluctuation pattern from the start of the special view fluctuation display game to the reaching state and the special drawing fluctuation display after reaching the reaching state The second half variation pattern may be set before the end of the game. The first half variation pattern may be set after the second half variation pattern is set.
As shown in FIG. 40, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step S631). Next, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag and the stop symbol pattern is acquired and prepared (step S632).

Next, random numbers are loaded from the target variation pattern random number storage area and prepared (step S633). The loaded random number (variation pattern random number) is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 by lottery. Next, the target variation pattern random number storage area is cleared to "0" (step S634).
In the variation pattern setting process, as in the flow of this embodiment, even if loading of random numbers from the variation pattern random number storage area of interest and “0” clear of the variation pattern random number storage area of interest are performed separately It is good and it may be made to carry out at a stretch using not only this but exchange instructions, for example. In the case of performing at once, for example, the register to be loaded is set in advance to “0”, and processing such as exchanging each other is performed. Such a modification process is applicable not only to the application to the processes of steps S633 and S634 in the variation pattern setting process but also to a process in which the loading of information to the area and the clearing of the information are a set.

Next, 2-byte distribution processing is performed (step S635). The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern number of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number.
Next, the variation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the variation pattern number area (step S636). As a result of this processing, the variation patterns of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are set based on the variation pattern numbers. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, among a plurality.
After passing through step S636, the variation pattern setting process is ended.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps S 554 and S 574) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The change start information setting process is to set information of change start in the first special view variable display game and the second special view change display game.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value table is set (step S641), the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special view game processing timer area (step S642). In the present embodiment, there are a total of 40 variation patterns.
After that, the variation command corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step S643), and the rendering command setting process is performed (step S644). Thereby, the fluctuation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the fluctuation start of the decoration special figure related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 Will be done.
After step S644, the variation start information setting process is ended.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, a decorative special view reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations) about special view 2, an decorative special view command including information on stop symbols, special drawing The fluctuation command including information on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game is mentioned, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S384) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure changing process, first, "3" is set as the process number (step S651), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "3" is saved) (Step S652). Thus, in the routine for the next special figure game process, "3" is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process is branched to the special figure display process (step S385).
Next, the display time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S653). Next, a signal relating to the end of the special view 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S654). As a result, the special figure 1 fluctuating signal is turned off. Further, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S655). As a result, the special figure 2 fluctuating signal is turned off.
Then, the stop flag is saved in the special view 1 fluctuation control flag area (step S566), and then the stop flag is saved in the special view 2 fluctuation control flag area (step S567). After passing through step S567, the special figure changing process is ended.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step S385) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure display processing, first, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area and prepared (step S661). Next, an effect command setting process is performed (step S662). As a result, the decoration special drawing command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the control of the production control device 300 corresponds to the display of the decoration special drawing related to the special view 1 or the special view 2 on the information display 45 An effect display will be performed.
Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step S663), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S664). As a result, the small hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display related to the small hit fanfare is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.

Next, the value of the small hitting operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S665), and thereafter the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S666).
The value of the small hit operation is set to determine whether the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 are to be opened twice in succession or to be opened once.
Further, the stopper solenoid control process controls the accessory sorenoi 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 up and down, and information advantageous to the player by lamp notification etc. 1) Perform processing such as presenting information to teach the timing to stop the bat body 53 by driving the bat member 53 upward to roll the bridge main body 80 of the role object device 51 and to flow into the hell inflow space 63 is there.
Since the stopper solenoid control pointer is set according to the value of the small hitting operation by the process of step S665, the bat member 53 in the first character device 51 is driven up and down, and a game advantageous to the player is played It will be.
Next, it is determined whether the small hit operation is twice open (step S667). This is a small hit has an opening or a double opening, but when such a small hit occurs, whether the movable members 43a and 43b in the fluctuation winning device 35 perform an operation to open twice in a row Is determined.

If the small hit operation does not open twice (step S667; NO), the start value of the open once is saved in the processing control pointer area during the special drawing (step S668), and the processing control pointer upper limit value for the special drawing The upper limit value of the one-time opening is saved in the area (step S669). In this case, “0” is set as the start value of the one-time opening, and “0” is set as the upper limit value. Thereby, an operation of opening the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 once is performed. After step S669, the process proceeds to step S670.
On the other hand, if the small hitting operation is opened twice (step S667; YES), the start value of the opening twice is saved in the processing control pointer area during the special drawing (step S671), and the processing control pointer during the special drawing The upper limit value of the second opening is saved in the upper limit value area (step S672). In this case, “0” is set as the start value of the second opening, and “2” is set as the upper limit value. Thus, an operation of opening the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 twice in succession is performed. After step S672, the process proceeds to step S670.

If it progresses to step S670, it will be determined whether it is in a movement of the special figure 1. This is a special figure 1 for displaying the special view 1 among the LED segments in the collective display 50 with the game ball winning to the first start winning opening (left starting opening, right starting opening) 33a, 33b. It is determined whether the special figure fluctuation in the display is performed. If the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step S679; YES), the signal concerning the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S673), and then the process goes to step S674.
The signals relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit include the following, all of which are in the on state.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal ON ・ Special electric accessory 1 operating signal ON ・ Condition device operating area 1 effective signal ON ・ A character continuous operating device operating area 1 effective signal ON while fluctuation of special figure 1 If it is not inside (step S670; NO), the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S675), and then the process proceeds to step S674.
As a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 small hit, there are the following, and all are in the on state.
・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal ON ・ Special electric accessory 1 operating signal ON ・ Condition device operating area 1 effective signal ON ・ Item continuous operating device operating area 1 effective signal ON

In step S674, a small hit opening operation start command is prepared, and then, a rendering command setting process is performed (step S676). As a result, the small hit opening operation start command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display regarding the start of the small hit opening operation is performed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, "4" is set as the process number (step S677), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "4" is saved) (step S678). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "4" is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to small hit open processing (step S386).
Next, the small hit open time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S679). The small hit opening time is set to, for example, 400 ms. Next, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S 680). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open corresponding to the small hit opening time. .

Next, the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S681), and the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step S682). Since the openable control of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 is carried out corresponding to the small hit opening time, it is expected that the game ball will be awarded to the variable winning device 35 (big winning opening). The special area passage flag corresponding to the output of the specific area switch 111 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the special winning area 69 is cleared in advance, and the special winning opening count number is also cleared. .
Next, the output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the bonus item number signal control timer area (step S683), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step S684). Since these set the period which outputs the number-of-objects signal as one of the various output data of the external information which is output to the external information terminal board 152, since it is not the big winning opening fraud monitoring period during the small hitting operation, A process is performed to remove the fraud monitoring period. After passing through step S684, the processing in the special view display is ended.

[Small hit open processing]
Next, the details of the small hit open process (step S 386) in the above-described special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 44, in the small hit open processing, first, the control pointer is loaded and prepared during the special view (step S691). Next, the value of the control pointer in the loaded special view is compared with the small hit operation end value, and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer in the loaded special view is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step S692 ). This is to compare the value of the control pointer during the loaded special drawing with the upper limit value for terminating the small hitting operation, and to judge whether the value has exceeded it.
If the value of the control pointer in the loaded special image is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step S692; NO), the small hitting operation shift setting process is performed (step S693). As a result, in the case of a small hit, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open for a certain period of time, and a game in which the gaming ball wins the big winning opening (the variable winning device 35) is performed. Although the opening control of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 has one opening and two openings, the details of the operation will be described later.

Next, the control pointer is updated by "+1" during the special view (step S694), a small hit operating command corresponding to the control pointer during the special view is prepared (step S695), and then a rendering command setting process is performed. (Step S696). As a result, the small hit operation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect control corresponding to the small hit operation on the information display 45 is performed by the control of the effect control device 300. . After passing through step S696, the small hit open processing ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer in the loaded special view is greater than or equal to the small hitting operation end value (step S692; YES), the process branches to step S697 to set "5" as the process number (step S697). The processing number is saved in the figure game processing number area (here, "5" is saved) (step S698). As a result, in the routine of the next special figure game process, "5" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to small hit remaining ball processing (step S387).
Next, a small hit large winning opening closed command is prepared (step S699), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S700). As a result, a command for closing the small hit large winning opening is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the large winning hole closing in a small hit is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300. It will be After passing through step S700, the small hit open processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation shift setting process (step S693) in the above-described small hit open process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 45, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, first, a branch determination is performed by the control pointer during the special drawing (step S711). In this branch determination, the control destination is "0" or "1" and the branch destination is different.
That is, if the control pointer is "0" during the special figure, the process branches to step S712, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S712). The weight time is a period of an interval between the first opening and the second opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open twice during a small hit, and the weight time may be, for example, It is set to 1000 ms (see FIG. 46). Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S713). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed. After passing through step S713, the small hit operation shift setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the control pointer in the special figure hit is "1", the process branches to step S714, and the small hit open time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S715). The small hit opening time is a period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are open at the small hit, and the small hit opening time is set to, for example, 400 ms (see FIG. 46). Next, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S 715). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open.
Next, the output timer initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the role number signal control timer area (step S716). This is because the period for outputting the number-of-characters signal is set as one of various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 152, and the small winnings are not monitored during the small hit operation. A process is performed to remove the fraud monitoring period. After passing through step S716, the small hit operation shift setting process is ended.

[Timing chart of small hit operation]
Next, a specific example of the small hitting operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the small hitting operation shown in FIG.
In FIG. 46, in the small hit operation, there are cases where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once and the cases where the opening operation is performed twice. 46A shows the case where the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation once, and FIG. 46B shows the case where the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation twice.
First, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once, the movable members 43a, 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state) After a lapse of time (in this case, 400 ms), one predetermined opening operation is performed such as closing operation again. Therefore, in the case of one-time opening, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open for only 400 ms, and within this period, the game ball can be awarded to the variable winning device 35. A hit action is performed. Further, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided in advance with a display time (100 ms in this case) for notifying that there is an opening operation once.

At the time when the movable members 43a and 43b close after being opened once, the special pointer hits the control pointer = 0. Then, the small hitting residual ball time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and closed, and the small hitting residual ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms + α". The period “α” is continued until the game balls are exhausted from the fluctuation winning device 35. For example, when there are remaining balls in the fluctuation winning device 35, the game balls are missing from the fluctuation winning device 35. It will continue until it is cut. Therefore, the period of “α” is not a fixed period, but a variable period which continues until the game balls are completely removed from the variable winning device 35.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as the small hit residual ball time has elapsed, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time is present for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period in which an effect display is performed to inform the information display 45 that the small hit is ending.
When observed from the player's line of sight, the small ball remaining ball time “1900 ms + α” starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then the small ball ending time (100 ms) continues without breaks. The ending period of is a continuous period obtained by adding the small ball remaining ball time “1900 ms + α” and the small ball ending time (100 ms), ie, 2000 ms.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (convert to the second state), An opening operation of a predetermined mode such as closing operation again after a predetermined time (in this case, 400 ms) is repeated twice. In this case, the first open period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms, and subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after 400 ms, and thereafter, a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided as an interval period. In this period, the movable members 43a and 43b continue closing, and the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed simultaneously with the end of the predetermined weight time. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also, for example, 400 m. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open for only 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time interposed. Then, a small hit operation is performed in a mode in which winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 35 is possible within a period when the opening operation is performed twice. Further, the information display 45 for displaying the effect state is provided in advance with a display time (100 ms in this case) for notifying that there is an opening operation twice.

In the case of the double opening operation as described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened after the first opening and then closed, the special pointer hits the control pointer = 0. Then, after the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, the predetermined wait time (1000 ms) starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed, and the second open operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is started simultaneously with the end of the predetermined wait time . At this time, at the time when the movable members 43a and 43b start opening for the second time, the special pointer hits the control pointer = 1.
Thereafter, the small hitting residual ball time starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after the second opening period of the movable members 43a and 43b has passed, and the small hitting residual ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms + α". The period “α” is continued until the game balls are completely exhausted from the variable winning device 35, which has the same property as the case of the above-described one-time opening operation.
Next, when “1900 ms + α” as the small hit residual ball time has elapsed, an operation is performed such that the small hit ending time is present for a predetermined time (here, 100 ms) from the elapsed timing. The small hit ending time is, for example, a period in which an effect display is performed to inform the information display 45 that the small hit is ending.
Similarly, in the case of the operation of opening twice, when observed with the line of sight of the player, the small ball remaining ball time "1900 ms + α" starts from the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once and then closed. Since the hitting ending time (100 ms) continues, the apparent ending period is a continuous period including the small hitting remaining ball time “1900 ms + α” and the small hitting ending time (100 ms), that is, 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step S387) in the above-mentioned special view game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 47, in the small hit residual ball processing, first, it is judged whether the residual ball counter is "0" (step S721), and the residual ball counter is not "0" (step S721; NO), finish small hit residual ball processing.
On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S721; YES), it is determined that no remaining ball exists inside the variable winning device 35, and the value of the stopping operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area S722). Next, the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S723). As a result, when there is no remaining ball inside the variable winning device 35, the stopper solenoid operation is stopped and the stopper solenoid control is ended.

Next, a small hit ending command is prepared (step S 724), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S 725). As a result, the small hit ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect control corresponding to the small hit ending is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, "6" is set as the process number (step S726), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "6" is saved) (step S727). Thus, in the routine for the next special figure game process, “6” is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the small hitting end process (step S388).
Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S 728), and the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step S 729). This is to set the small hitting ending time with the end of the small hitting operation, to perform the effect of the ending, clear the count number of the game ball to the big winning opening (fluctuation winning device 35), next time Prepare for the operation (including both big hit and small hit). Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step S730).
The signals relating to the end of the small hit operation include the following, all of which are in the off state.
・ Special symbol 1 small hit signal off ・ Special symbol 2 small hit signal off ・ Condition device operation area 1 valid signal off ・ Attachment continuous operation device working area 1 valid signal off Step S730, small hit remaining End the ball processing.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step S388) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 48, in the small hitting end process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passing (step S741). This is because the specific area switch 111 for detecting the gaming ball having passed the special winning area 69 is disposed inside the variable winning device 35, and the specific area switch 111 detects that the gaming ball has passed through the special winning area 69. Then, since it is configured to perform a big hit lottery as V winning, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the specific area switch 111.
If there is no specific area passage of the game ball (step S741; NO), the process branches to step S755, and sets "1" as the process number (step S755) and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (here Save "1" (step S756). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “1” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the process number, and the process branches to the special figure routine process (step S383).
Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S757).
The signals relating to the end of the small hit include the following, all of which are in the off state.
-Special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF-Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF Next, the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step S758), and the small hit termination process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is a specific area passing of the game ball (step S741: YES), a command is loaded from the decoration special view command area and prepared (step S742), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S743). Thereby, the decoration special drawing command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the decoration special drawing command (for example, the decoration special drawing command for producing the occurrence of the big hit) is displayed on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. A corresponding effect display will be performed.

Next, a big hit fanfare command is prepared (step S744), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S743). As a result, the big hit fanfare command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the big hit fanfare command on the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, a effect display informing a big hit with fanfare) ) Will be done.
Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is saved in the external information output data area (step S746). Thereby, information regarding the pachinko machine 1 such as the special winning opening open information is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
As signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information, there are the following, all of which are in the on state.
・ On the big hit "On big hit signal 1" ・ On the 16R big hit "On big hit signal 2" Next, set "7" as the processing number (step S747) and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Here, "7" is saved (step S748). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “7” is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the process number, and the process branches to the fan-far / interval process (step S389).

Next, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 15 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S749), and the specific area passing flag area is cleared (step S750). Next, a signal relating to the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S751).
There are the following signals regarding the jackpot to start, and all are in the on state.
· Condition device in operation signal ON ・ Character continuous operation device in operation signal ON Next, save the initial value (eg, "1") in the number of rounds area (step S752). This is to count the number of rounds of the big hit. Next, the jackpot number is saved in the gaming state display number area (step S753). Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step S754), and the small hitting end process is ended.

[Fan-Fir / Processing in interval]
Next, the details of the fan-far / in-interval process (step S 389) in the above-described special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the fan fur / interval process, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step S761), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S762). And effect command setting processing (step S763). Thereby, the round command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the round command is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the effect display notifying the number of rounds in the special gaming state) ) Will be done.
Next, a special winning opening opening time value corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step S764). The special winning opening open time value is, for example, 800 ms or 200 ms, as described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the special winning opening open time value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S765), and the special winning opening opening information and the start value and upper limit of the control pointer corresponding to the number of rounds are saved (step S766) . For example, as a mode of big hit game, for example, when performing full opening, 20 as a start value, 54 as an upper limit, when performing rank-up opening, 2 as a start value and 54 as an upper limit, when performing short opening 0 is set as the start value and 0 is set as the upper limit value. The details of full opening, rank up opening, and short opening will be described later.
A specific example of the special winning opening open and the control pointer will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the start value is saved in the control pointer area during special drawing (step S767), and the upper limit value is saved in the control pointer upper limit value area during special drawing (step S767). Next, the value of the big hit operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S769), and the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S770). Thereby, when the stopper solenoid control pointer becomes the value of the big hit operation (that is, when the big hit operation is started), the stopper solenoid operation is changed, and the stopper solenoid control in the big hit operation is started .
Next, "8" is set as the process number (step S771), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "8" is saved) (step S772). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “8” is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process is branched to the special winning opening open process (step S390).

Next, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S773). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open corresponding to the big hit opening time.
Next, the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step S775). Since this is not a big winning opening fraud monitoring period during the operation of the big hit, it performs processing for removing the fraud monitoring period. Next, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S776).
There are the following signals relating to the start of the big winning opening opening, and it is in the on state.
· Special motorized item 1 in operation signal is on After Step S776, the fan fur / interval in-process processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening open process (step S390) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special winning opening open processing, first, the control pointer is loaded and prepared during the special drawing (step S781). Next, the value of the control pointer in the loaded special view is compared with the big hit operation end value, and it is determined whether the value of the loaded control pointer in the special figure is greater than the big hit operation end value (step S782). This is to compare the value of the loaded control pointer during the special map load with the upper limit value for ending the big hit operation, and to judge whether the value has exceeded it.
If the value of the control pointer in the loaded special view is not greater than the big hit operation end value (step S 782; NO), the control pointer in the special figure is updated by “+1” (step S 783), and the big hit operation transition setting processing is performed. (Step S784). Since the value of the control pointer during the special figure is not equal to or more than the upper limit value for terminating the big hit operation, the big hit operation of various modes is performed according to the value of the control pointer during the special figure (details will be described later) ). After the step S784, the processing of the special winning opening open ends.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer in the special view loaded is greater than the big hit operation end value (step S 782: YES), the process branches to step S 785 to determine whether it is the final round of the big hit. If it is not the final round of the big hit (step S785; NO), the remaining ball processing time (for example, 796 ms) for other than the final round is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S786). Next, an interval command is prepared (step S787), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S788). Thus, the interval command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the interval command is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, effect display informing the interval between rounds) ) Will be done.
After step S788, the process proceeds to step S789.

If it is the final round of the big hit in step S785 (step S785; YES), the process branches to step S790. Then, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) for the final round is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S 790). Next, a big hit ending command is prepared (step S791), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step S791). As a result, the big hit ending command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the big hit ending command on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, a effect such as reporting the big hit ending). Will be done.
After step S 792, the process proceeds to step S 789.
When the process proceeds from step S788 or step S792 to step S789, the value of the stopping operation is saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S789), and the stopper solenoid control timer area is cleared to "0" (step S793). Thereby, when the stopper solenoid control pointer becomes the value of the stop operation (that is, when the big hit operation is ended), the stopper solenoid operation is changed, and the stopper solenoid control is ended.
Next, "9" is set as the process number (step S794), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "9" is saved) (step S795). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, "9" is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the process number, and the process is branched to the special winning opening residual ball process (step S391).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S796). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to stop. After passing through step S796, the process for opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Big hit operation shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit operation shift setting process (step S390) in the above-mentioned process for opening the big winning opening will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the big hit operation shift setting process, first, branch determination is performed by the control pointer during the special figure (step S801). In this branch determination, the control pointer is "even" or "odd" in the special view, and the branch destination is different, and the control pointer in the special figure is "odd from 3 to 17" and "19" among the "odd". The branch destination is different even if "odd number up to 53".
That is, if the control pointer is "even" during the special figure, the process branches to step S802, and the wait time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S802). The weight time is a period of an interval between the present opening and the next opening when the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 perform the opening operation at the time of big hit, and the weight time is set to 800 ms, for example. (See FIG. 52).
Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S803). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned off, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed. After the step S 803, the big hit operation shift setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the control pointer is "odd" during the special drawing, the branch destination differs depending on the "odd" range. That is, if the control pointer is "odd number from 3 to 17" during the special figure among "odd number", the process branches to step S804, and the big hit rank up open time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804).
In the big hit rank up opening time, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open at the big hit and the round game is performed multiple times, but during the predetermined round game on the way, suddenly, 16R big hit The effect is being promoted to a period of time during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open in the case of a so-called 16R big hit ranked up game (that is, opening in one round game) Operating period). In the present embodiment, the jackpot rank-up open time is set to, for example, 200 ms (see FIG. 52).
The jackpot rank-up opening operation is specifically performed in the eighth round (the seventh round of the jackpot substantially because the first round is excluded) in the case of a jackpot appearing per 7R among the 16R jackpots, 3R If it is a hit, it will be held in the fourth round (essentially the third round of the big hit).
Next, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S805). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open based on the big hit rank up opening time set in step S804. It will be done. After the step S805, the big hit operation shift setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the control pointer is "odd number 19 to 53" during the special drawing even among "odd", the process branches to step S806, and the big hit full open time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S804). ).
If the big hit full open time continues the round game by full open up to 3 rounds per 3R until 7 rounds out of 7 rounds, until all rounds which do not correspond to the above-mentioned big hit rank up open operation of 16 R big hits above The period during which the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 open the door (i.e., the opening operation period in a one-round game). In step S806, the jackpot full open time is set to, for example, 800 ms (see FIG. 52).
Next, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S807). As a result, the first large winning opening solenoid 201 and the second large winning opening solenoid 203 are turned on, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are controlled to open based on the big hit rank open opening time set in step S806. It will be done. After the step S 807, the big hit operation shift setting process is ended.

[Timing chart of the big hit operation]
Next, a specific example of the big hit operation will be described with reference to the timing chart of the big hit operation shown in FIG.
In FIG. 52, there are the following round modes in the big hit operation.
-Full opening This is a game mode in which the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open in all the rounds that do not correspond to the above-mentioned big hit rank-up opening operation of the 16R big hit.
・ Rank-up open 16R among the big hit, in the case of 7 rounds in the case of 7 rounds (7 rounds of the big hit substantially excluding the first round), 4 rounds in case of the rounds per 3 R This is a game mode that is played for the eyes (substantially the third round of the big hit). Therefore, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly promoting to a 16R big hit is performed, resulting in a so-called 16 R big hit ranked game.
· Short opening is a game mode to be performed in 8 to 16 rounds per 7R, 4 to 16 rounds per 3R, the opening time of the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 is short, substantially, out It corresponds to a round without balls. In the case of the 16R big hit, such short opening is not included.

When the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once as the one round operation of the big hit as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the full opening is the opening operation ( An opening operation of a predetermined mode is performed such as conversion to the second state) and closing operation again after a predetermined time (in this case, 800 ms).
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are open for only 800 ms, and a big hit of an aspect in which a game ball can be awarded to the fluctuation winning device 35 within this period. The action is taken. A closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed is provided until the next opening game.
Then, the opening and closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeatedly performed 18 times in one round, and the 18 opening and closing controls are configured as one round. That is, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a form (800 ms on + 800 ms off) x 18 times = 1 round game.

In the 16R big hit, the first game to generate a big hit does not correspond to a game with a big hit round pop, so the round with a big pop is practically 15R.
In the full open jackpot, one round game as described above is executed. Then, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed at the final round of each round, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the closed timing, and the big hit remaining ball time is It becomes a period of "796 ms".
In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there are remaining balls in the variable winning device 35, the game is transferred to the next round game. This is because the remaining balls are likely to get out of the variable winning device 35 during the next round game.
Then, a period until it shifts to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 1204 ms).
In this manner, in the case of the full open jackpot, the above-described one-round game is repeatedly executed up to the fifteenth round, and when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed at the final round of the fifteenth round As shown in (a), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the above-mentioned closed timing, and only in this case the big hit remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms" and is set to a longer time. This is because the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game take slightly longer time to get out of the fluctuation winning device 35. Then, when the remaining ball time ("1900 ms" has elapsed, the operation shifts to the big hit end operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the above-mentioned full opening is performed in the round game before the 16R big hit ranking (promotion) is performed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b).
Next, during a specific round game in the middle of the round game of the big hit (during a specific round), an effect is suddenly made to be promoted to the 16 R big hit, and a so-called 16 R big hit ranked game (rank Move to open up).
In the round game of rank-up opening, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open once as the first half operation of one round of the big hit, the movable members 43a and 43b open (a second state) After the predetermined time elapses (here 200 ms), the opening operation of a predetermined mode is performed once.
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for only 200 ms, but in practice, the gaming ball wins the variable winning device 35 within this period. A big hit action is performed in a mode that is a somewhat difficult situation. Further, a closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed is provided until the next opening game.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeatedly performed nine times in the first half of one round.

Next, the same operation as the above-described full opening is performed as the second half operation of one round of the big hit. That is, in the second half operation of one round of the big hit, when the movable members 43a, 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once, the movable members 43a, 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state) A predetermined mode of opening operation is performed once, such as closing operation again after (here, 800 ms has elapsed).
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are open for only 800 ms, and a big hit of an aspect in which a game ball can be awarded to the fluctuation winning device 35 within this period. The action is taken. A closing period (800 ms) in which the movable members 43a and 43b are closed is provided until the next opening game.
Then, the opening / closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b as described above is repeatedly performed 18 times in the second half of one round.
Therefore, in the whole of one round, it becomes the form of the round game including 27 times of opening and closing control which added the first half of nine times of one round and the latter half of eighteen times of one round. In this case, 27 open / close controls, which add the first half and the second half, are configured as one round, and this round corresponds to a specific round for performing a rank-up game. And in the middle of this particular round game (during a particular round), a game form that adds the second half of one round of 18 times suddenly corresponds to an effect such as promoting to 16R big hit, which is the so-called 16R It corresponds to the game of jackpot rank up (rank up release).
Therefore, in the rank-up game, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 have a form (200 ms on + 800 ms off) x 9 times = first half of one round in the first half of one round and (800 ms on in the second half of one round) In the form of +800 ms off) × 18 times = latter half of the second round, the opening and closing control of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed 27 times as a whole.
Then, when it shifts to the next round game, since it has already been upgraded and promoted to 16R big hit, the same round game as full opening as mentioned above will be performed from next time, and the round before the rank increase A big hit game will be played such that the total number of rounds including the number and the number of rounds after rank-up is 16.

Also, even in the rank-up opening as described above, when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed at the final round of each round, as shown in FIG. The ball time starts, and the big hit remaining ball time is a period of "796 ms". In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there are remaining balls in the variable winning device 35, the game proceeds to the next round game. This is because the remaining balls are likely to get out of the variable winning device 35 during the next round game.
Then, a period until it shifts to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 1204 ms).
In this manner, as described above, the big hit game after the rank increase is repeatedly executed until the final 15 rounds, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 are performed at the final round of the 15 round game. Is closed, the big hit remaining ball time starts from the above closed timing, and only in this case the big hit remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms" and is set to a longer time . This is because the remaining balls in the final round of the 15-round game take slightly longer time to get out of the fluctuation winning device 35. Then, when the remaining ball time ("1900 ms" has elapsed, the operation shifts to the big hit end operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open once as the first one round operation of the big hit, as shown in FIG. In this case, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state), and the opening operation of the predetermined mode is performed once such that the closing operation is performed again after the predetermined time (200 ms here).
Therefore, in the case of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are opened for only 200 ms, but in practice, the gaming ball wins the variable winning device 35 within this period. A big hit action is performed in a mode that is a somewhat difficult situation.
Then, as described above, after the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening and closing operation once, as shown in FIG. , Big hit remaining ball time will be a period of "796 ms".
In this case, the remaining ball time (796 ms) is short, and even if there are remaining balls in the variable winning device 35, the game is transferred to the next round game. This is because the remaining balls are likely to get out of the variable winning device 35 during the next round game.

Then, a period before shifting to the next round game is an interval period (for example, 4 ms), and the interval period here becomes extremely short.
Also, in the jackpot of the short opening, the above-mentioned one round game is repeatedly executed from the predetermined round to the final round, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are closed at the final round of the last round game. As shown in 52 (c), the big hit remaining ball time starts from the above closed timing, and only in this case the big hit remaining ball time becomes a period of "1900 ms" and is set to a longer time. This is because the remaining balls in the final round game of the last round game take a somewhat long time to get out of the fluctuation winning device 35. Then, when the remaining ball time ("1900 ms" has elapsed, the operation shifts to the big hit end operation.
As described above, the short release is used from 8 rounds per 7R to 4 rounds after 3Rs, the open time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning apparatus 35 is short, and the balls are substantially out It will be equivalent to no round.
In addition, after 8 rounds per 7R, 4 rounds after 3Rs will be open for short, and the rounds having no balls will be performed substantially after the above 8 rounds, 4 rounds or later.
Also, in the case of 7R, the above-mentioned full release is performed up to 7 rounds, and the operation of short release is performed in the subsequent rounds (from 8 rounds to 16 rounds). Similarly, in the case of 3Rs, the above-mentioned full release is performed up to 3 rounds, and the operation of short release is performed in the subsequent rounds (from 4 rounds to 16 rounds).
Therefore, in the case of per 7R or 3R, the player is aware that the jackpot operation is (substantially) complete because the full opening is performed until the middle round and then the short opening round is started. It will end up.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step S391) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 53, in the big winning opening residual ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is the final round of the big hit game (for example, 16 rounds if it is 16 R big hit) (step S811), the big hit If it is not the final round of the game (step S811; NO), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step S812). Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step S813). The contents of the next round game are determined by the settings in steps S811 and S812.

Next, "7" is set as the process number (step S815), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "7" is saved) (step S816). As a result, in the routine of the next special figure game process, "7" is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process proceeds to the fanfare / interval process (step S389).
Next, a signal relating to the end of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817).
There are the following signals as to the start of the special winning opening open end, and the signal is off.
-Special motorized symbol 1 operating signal is turned off After passing through step S187, the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round of the big hit game (step S811; YES), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is "0" (step S818). If the remaining ball counter is not "0" (step S818; NO), there are still remaining balls in the fluctuation winning device 35, so the process does not shift to the big hit end processing (step S392), and the big winning opening remaining ball End the process. Then, the routine is repeated, and when the remaining ball counter becomes “0” (step S 818; YES), since the remaining ball is not present, “10” is set as the processing number (step S 819), and the special figure game processing The processing number is saved in the number area (here, "10" is saved) (step S820). Thereby, in the routine in the next special figure game process, “10” is selected as the process number in branch destination determination of the subroutine call based on the process number, and the process branches to the big hit end process (step S392).

Next, the big hit ending time (for example, 610 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S 821), and a signal regarding the end of the big winning opening opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S 822).
The signals relating to the end of the big winning opening opening include the following and are in the off state.
-Special motorized symbol 1 in operation signal OFF Next, clear winning a prize opening count number territory is cleared (step S823). This sets the big hit ending time with the end of the big hit operation and performs the effect of the ending, clears the count number of the game ball's winnings to the big winning opening (the change winning device 35), and makes the next hit It prepares for operation (including both big hit and small hit). Next, the round number area is cleared (step S824). Next, the special winning opening opening information area is cleared (step S825), and a flag for the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (826). In this case, since the operation of the big hit is completed and the big winning opening fraud monitoring period is over again, processing for returning to the fraud monitoring period is performed. After passing through step S8260, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step S392) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 55, in the big hit end process, first, "1" is set as the process number (step S831), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (here, "1" is saved) ( Step S832). As a result, in the routine for the next special figure game process, "1" is selected as the process number in the branch destination determination of the subroutine call by the process number, and the special figure routine process (step S383) is branched. The normal middle number is saved in the status display number area (step S833). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step S 834). As a result, information on the pachinko machine 1 such as a signal on the end of the big hit is output to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are in the off state.
-Big hit 1 signal OFF-Big hit 2 signal OFF Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step S 835).
The signals relating to the end of the big hit include the following, all of which are in the off state.
· Condition device in operation signal OFF · Awn continuous operation device in operation signal OFF After step S 835, the big hit end processing is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, the command setting process in other processes including the command setting process (step S458) in the special view 2 start port switch process described above and the command setting process (step S516) in the specific area switch monitoring process will be described with reference to Do. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S841), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S842; YES), the process returns to step S841 to repeat the loop. By this, it waits until the serial transmission buffer for effect is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S842; NO), the process proceeds to step S843 to write command data (MODE (upper byte)) into the serial transmission buffer (step S843).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step S844), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step S845; YES), the process returns to step S844 to repeat the loop. By this, it waits until the serial transmission buffer for effect is not full.
On the other hand, if the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step S845; NO), the process proceeds to step S846 to write command data (ACTION (lower byte)) in the serial transmission buffer. After passing through step S846, the rendering command setting process ends.
As described above, since the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. The command may also be transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step S394) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 56, in the symbol variation control process, first, at step S851, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol of interest (read from (I) below) is varying.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(A) Address of variation control flag area (B) Address of symbol display table (for variation) (C) Address of symbol display table (for stopping) In addition, information defined on the symbol display table (for variation) Is as follows.
(D) Address of variation symbol number area (E) Display data (There are several minutes of variation symbol number)
(F) Address of segment area Further, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Address of stop symbol number area (H) Display data (There are several minutes of stop symbol number)
(I) Segment area address

The check result in step S851 is determined in step S852, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step S853 to acquire the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol . Next, in step S 854, the target blinking fluctuation timer is updated by “−1”, and it is checked whether time is up (flicker fluctuation timer = 0). The check result in step S854 is determined in step S855, and if time is not up (NO), the process jumps to step S858 to display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area ((e), (above) Get the chi)).
Next, proceeding to step S859, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (the above (f) and (f)), and the routine is ended.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S855 that the target blinking fluctuation timer has timed out (YES), the flow advances to step S856 to save the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms) in the target blinking control timer area. Next, after updating the target variable symbol number ((D) above in step S857 by “+1”, the process proceeds to step S858, and display data ((E) above corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area (H)) to get. Next, proceeding to step S859, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (the above (f) and (f)), and the routine is ended.
Therefore, at this time, the blinking control timer initial value is saved by the time-up of the blinking fluctuation timer of the object, the fluctuation symbol number of the object is updated, and the display data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation symbol number area of the object is It will be saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the variation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopping at the above-mentioned step S852 (NO), the process branches to step S860 and symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the target symbol (above) (H)), and then in step S861 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of interest, and then saves the acquired display data in the segment area of interest (step S859) to execute the routine. Finish.
Therefore, at this time, the symbol display data for stop is saved in the target segment area by stopping from the change control flag of the target symbol being changed.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S635) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of a special figure variation display game from selection tables such as a special figure 1 variation pattern selection table and a special figure 2 variation pattern selection table based on variation pattern random numbers.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart of 2-byte distribution processing in the case where the size of the random number used for distribution is 2 bytes. The 2-byte data is, for example, "0" to "49999".
When this routine is started, it is checked in step S881 if the head data of the target selection table is a no-distribution code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group, and, for example, if distribution is not necessary, a code without distribution is defined at the top.
If it is determined that the first data in the selection table is a code without distribution (step S 882; YES), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step S 887), and the distribution process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S882 that the first data in the selection table is not a code without distribution (step S882; NO), one distribution value defined first in the selection table is acquired (step S883) .
Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S883 from the random number value (for example, the value of the variation pattern random number) checked in step S881 (step S884), and then the calculation is performed It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885).

Here, if it is determined that the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step S885; NO), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (step S886), and then the process returns to step S883 to repeat the loop. .
That is, after the distribution value defined next in the selection table is obtained in step S883, the new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value using the new random number value determined in step S884 as the random number value. It calculates (step S884). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step S885).
The above-described process is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step S885 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step S885; YES). Thereby, any one variation pattern group is selected from at least one variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
Then, if it is determined in step S885 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S885; YES), the process proceeds to step S887 and is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (Step S887), the distribution process ends.

Thus, for example, in the determination of whether or not the reach condition is generated in the special view change display game, and in the determination of the reach change mode in the special view change display game when the reach state occurs, for example, the change pattern random number. The above selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as a special figure 1 variation pattern selection table or a special figure 2 variation pattern selection table.
The selection tables such as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table are used in the special figure fluctuation display game when the reach state occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game or when the reach state occurs. Depending on the type of reach (reach variation mode), a plurality of latter half variation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 171B storing the variation group selection table is the first special figure in the special figure variation display game, the second special As variation modes in the figure (identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (variation pattern group) relating to each setting of the no reach variation mode in which the reach state does not occur and a plurality of reach variation modes Are stored in association with each other in the order of
Therefore, when the data at the top of the selection table is not a non-allocation code by executing this distribution process, a new value is generated based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the random value related to the determination. By calculating the random number value and repeating the process of determining whether the new random number value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one fluctuation pattern group is quickly set among the plurality of fluctuation pattern groups. I am able to do that.

[Stopper solenoid control process]
Next, the details of the stopper solenoid control process (step S397) in the special view game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the stopper solenoid control process, it is first determined whether the stopper solenoid control pointer is a no change code (step S891). If the stopper solenoid control pointer is a no change code (step S891; YES), the stopper solenoid control process is ended.
On the other hand, if the stopper solenoid control pointer is not a no change code (step S891; NO), the stopper solenoid control timer is updated by "-1" (step S892) and it is determined whether the stopper solenoid control timer is "0". It determines (step S893). If the stopper solenoid control timer is not "0" (step S893; NO), the stopper solenoid control process is ended and the routine is repeated.
If the stopper solenoid control timer is "0" (step S893; YES), the stopper solenoid control table is set (step S894), and the table address corresponding to the stopper solenoid control pointer is calculated (step S895).

Subsequently, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the stopper solenoid control pointer area (step S896). Next, the control timer for the next operation is acquired, and saved in the stopper solenoid control timer area (step S897). Next, the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the stopper solenoid output data area (step S898).
Then, it is determined whether or not the left stopper solenoid output is on (step S899). If the left stopper solenoid output is not on (step S899; NO), the stopper solenoid control process is ended.
On the other hand, if the left stopper solenoid output is on (step S899; NO), the left stopper on information command is prepared (step S900), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S901). As a result, the left stopper on information command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the information display 45 according to the control of the effect control device 300 provides information advantageous to the player (the game ball is a bridge of the first item device 51 The effect display is performed to inform the user of the timing to drive the bat member 53 upward to prevent the body 80 from rolling and flowing into the hell inflow space 63. After step S901, the stopper solenoid control process ends.
As described above, in the stopper solenoid control process, the control of the accessory solenoid 203 for driving the pigeon member 52 in the first character apparatus 51 up and down and the control of the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 up and down are performed. Information that is advantageous to the player by lamp notification etc. (The game ball moves the bridge main body 80 of the first character device 51 and flows into the hell inflow space 63 by driving the bat member 53 upward, A process is performed to produce information that teaches the timing of blocking.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the segment LED editing process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description of the flowchart, “step A” is used as the step number.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the batch display device 50 (FIGS. 2 and 10), and the batch display device 50 displays a so-called special view (this special view) as described above. Furthermore, it is a display to display the start display of the start memory of the special view (this special view) (in some cases, referred to as the special view hold display) or the display of the gaming state, for example, a plurality of indicators , An indicator consisting of one small lamp, or an indicator of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers etc. as this special drawing. For example, among the LED segments in the batch display device 50, those displaying Special Drawing 1 are arranged as Special Drawing 1 displays, those displaying Special Drawing 2 are arranged as Special Drawing 2 displays.
These displays are performed by, for example, a plurality of displays (for example, one lamp or 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emission source, and settings relating to driving of those configured with such segment LEDs Is the segment LED editing process.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the segment LED editing process, first, a gaming state display table is set (step A1). The gaming state display table is for displaying the current gaming state, and for example, data necessary for informing the gaming state such as whether or not a big hit is set. Next, display data corresponding to the gaming state number is acquired and saved in a segment area (for example, a segment area of the gaming state display portion in the collective display device 50) (step A2). Then, the special figure 2 reservation number display table is set (step A3). The special figure 2 pending number display table is for displaying the current pending state of the special figure 2, and for example, data necessary for notifying the gaming state such as whether or not the special figure 2 is pending is set. Ru.
Next, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired and saved in a segment area (for example, a segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display) (step A4). After passing through step A4, the segment LED editing process is ended.

[Motor control processing]
Next, the motor control process (step S74) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, two of an accessory motor 81 (first motor) and an accessory motor 72 (second motor) are disposed as accessory motors. The accessory motor 81 (first motor) drives the bridge main body 80 in the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure up and down. Further, the accessory motor 72 (second motor) drives the rotation of the heaven rotator 67 in the heaven accessory device 66.
A motor 1 control pointer described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 81 (first motor). On the other hand, a motor 2 control pointer to be described later is a pointer for controlling the accessory motor 72 (second motor).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the motor control process, first, the address of the head area of the motor 1 control area is prepared (step A11). Next, the motor 1 operation table is prepared (step A12), and the motor 1 control pointer is loaded and retracted (step A13). Next, motor operation editing processing is performed (step A14). In the motor operation editing process, the ball catching process and the like of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) are performed using the motor 1 control pointer and the control timer (the details will be described later).
Next, the retracted motor 1 control pointer is restored (step A15), and the value of the motor 1 control pointer area is compared with the restored control pointer (step A16). As a result of comparing the value of the motor 1 control pointer area with the restored control pointer, it is determined whether the restored control pointer is updated (step A17). If the returned control pointer is updated (step A17; YES), the process proceeds to step A18 to determine whether the motor 1 is in the start position. As for the information indicating whether the motor 1 is in the start position, the bridge main body 80 in the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure driven by the accessory motor 81 (first motor) is on the heaven side (the right side It is information for notifying the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) that it starts to move in the direction to tilt to the side where the heaven inflow space 62 is).

On the other hand, if the returned control pointer is not updated (step A17; NO), the process jumps to step A22. Also, when the motor 1 is not in the start position (step A18; NO), the process jumps to step A22.
As described above, if the returned control pointer is updated (step A17; YES) and the motor 1 is in the start position (step A18; YES), the process proceeds to step A19, and the prize effect flag An in-production flag is saved in the area (step A19). Next, the effect start waiting time (for example, timer initial value = 100 ms) is saved in the feature effect command timer area (step A20). Next, presentation start information is saved in the feature presentation control information area (step A21). As described above, when the returned control pointer is updated and the motor 1 is in the start position, the driving of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) is controlled, and the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure is obtained. The bridge body 80 in the above is driven up and down. After step A21, the process proceeds to step A22.

When proceeding to step A22 through step A21, the returned control pointer is not updated (step A17; NO), and proceeds to step A22, and the motor 1 is not in the start position (step A18; NO) When proceeding to step A22, the address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared at step A22 (step A22). Next, the motor 2 operation table is prepared (step A23), and a motor operation editing process is performed (step A24). In the motor operation editing process, the ball catching process and the like of the accessory motor 72 (second motor) are performed using the motor 2 control table (details will be described later).
In this manner, the address of the head area of the motor 2 control area is prepared, and the driving of the bonus motor 72 (second motor) is controlled using the motor 2 operation table, and the heaven rotator 67 in the heaven prize device 66 Will be driven. After step A24, the motor control process ends.

[Motor operation editing process]
Next, motor operation editing processing (steps A14 and A24) in the above-described motor control processing will be described with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the motor operation editing process, first, it is determined whether the target control pointer is a no update code (step A31). If the target control pointer is a no-update code (step A31; YES), the motor operation editing process is ended.
In the present embodiment, two of the first character object device 51 and the heaven character object device 66 are provided as target character object devices, and among them, the first character object device 51 has a character motor 81 ( 1) motor is disposed, and the heavenly prize apparatus 66 is disposed with the prize motor 72 (second motor). Therefore, “targeted” in the case where it is described as the target control pointer refers to that of the bonus motor 81 (first motor) or the bonus motor 72 (second motor) that is currently targeted for control in the motor operation editing process. It points to either.
On the other hand, if the target control pointer is not a no update code (step A31; NO), the process proceeds to step A32, and it is determined whether the target control timer is "0". If the target control timer is "0" (step A32; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
If the target control pointer is not an update no code (step A31; NO) and the target control timer is not "0" (step A32; NO), the process proceeds to step A33, and the target control timer Update (step A33). Next, it is determined whether the target control timer is "0" (step A34), and if the target control timer is not "0" (step A34; NO), the process jumps to step A45.
On the other hand, if the target control timer is "0" (step A34; YES), the process proceeds to step A35.

In step A35, it is determined whether the target control information is time value control. This is to determine the target control information for controlling the value of time when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A35; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A35; NO), the process proceeds to step A36, and the number of target bites processing is updated by "+1". This is because although the control information of the target does not control the value of time (that is, the control of monitoring the state of the motor switch), the target value set to be equal to or more than the time required to detect the motor switch Since the control timer is updated until it reaches "0", there is a possibility that the gaming ball has bite any balls, so the number of times of ball biting processing of the object is updated by "+1".
This is to count the number of times when a bite occurs in the inside of the first character device 51 or the heaven character device 66.
When a bite occurs, for example, the accessory motor 81 of the first accessory device 51 is reversely rotated to widen the space between the bridge body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first accessory device 51 or the like. The processing often eliminates the bite of the ball. In addition, if, for example, the product motor 72 of the heaven character apparatus 66 is reversely rotated to increase the distance between the heaven rotator 67 and the inner wall surface of the heaven character apparatus 66, etc. It is often eliminated.
Next, the number of target ball biting processes is compared with an error occurrence determination value (for example, 3 times), and it is determined whether the number of target ball biting processes is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value (step A37).
In the drawings (FIG. 61, etc.), although it may be described as "ball bite", this has the same meaning as "ball bite", and both expressions may be used in the field of gaming machines. Because there is, it is doing so.
If the number of target ball biting processes is not more than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; NO), the process jumps to step A43 and sets the target ball biting in progress flag (step A43) and the target ball as a control pointer. At the time of bit loading, the next pointer is loaded (step A44). After step A44, the process proceeds to step A60 (FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if the target number of times of ball bite processing is equal to or more than the error occurrence determination value (step A37; YES), the process proceeds to step A38, and it is determined whether or not ball bite has already occurred error (step A38). If an error has not occurred (step A38; NO), save the item error occurrence flag in the target item error status flag area (step A39) and prepare the target item error occurrence command (Step A40). Next, an effect command setting process is performed (step A41). As a result, if the target number of ball biting processes is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and no ball biting error occurs yet, a feature error occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect is produced Under the control of the control device 300, an effect display corresponding to the item error occurrence command (for example, a display for notifying the occurrence of a ball bite error of a combination) is performed on the information display 45. After step A41, the process proceeds to step A42.
At step A42, as in the case described above, the number of ball biting processes to be performed is limited to the upper limit (for example, upper limit = error occurrence determination value (for example, "3" as described above) (step A42), Subsequently, when the target bite processing flag is set (step A43) and the target bit next time pointer is loaded as the control pointer (step A44), the process proceeds from step A44 to step A60 (FIG. 62).
On the other hand, if an error has occurred in the ball catching (step A38; YES), the process jumps to step A42 without performing the processes of steps A39 to A41, and the process of step A42 is executed. That is, at this time, the target number of ball biting processes is kept at the upper limit (step A42), the target bite processing flag is set (step A43), and the target ball biting next pointer is loaded as a control pointer ( Step A44) is performed.

As described above, if the number of target ball biting processes is not equal to or more than the error occurrence determination value, the number of target ball biting processes is kept at the upper limit value, and the target ball biting in progress flag is set to set the target ball balls as a control pointer. At biting, loading of the next pointer is performed.
On the other hand, although the number of times the target bite processing is equal to or more than the error occurrence determination value, when the bite error does not occur yet, the target item error status flag area saves the title error occurrence flag and the target The bonus character error generation command is prepared, and the effect display corresponding to the bonus character error generation command is performed on the information display 45.
In addition, when the target number of ball biting processes is equal to or greater than the error occurrence determination value and an error has already occurred, the target number of ball biting processes is limited to the upper limit value and the target bite processing is in progress. A flag is set, and loading of the target ball following pointer as a control pointer is performed.

On the other hand, as described above, the target control pointer is not an update-free code (step A 31; NO), the target control timer is not “0” (step A 32; NO), and then the target control timer 1 ”is updated (step A33), and if the target control timer is not“ 0 ”(step A34; NO), the process jumps to step A45, so the case of jumping to step A45 will be described.
In step A45, it is determined whether the target control information is time value control. This is to determine whether the target control information is to control the time value when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A45; YES), the process jumps to step A70.
On the other hand, if the target control information is not time value control (step A45; NO), the process proceeds to step A46, sets the motor control information table (step A46), and calculates the table address corresponding to the control information (step A47). Next, the address of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored, the monitoring bit data, and the determination data are acquired (step A48).
Here, the motor switch to be monitored refers to a switch that is currently to be monitored among the first motor switch 82 and the second motor switch 71.
The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 in the first accessory device 51 inclines the bridge body 80 to the left or right. Further, the second motor switch 71 detects the initial position of the accessory motor 72 in the heavenly prize device 66.

After step A48, the process proceeds to step A49, where the acquired data is used to check the state of the motor switch to be monitored (step A49). As a result, the state of the switch that is currently to be monitored among the first motor switch 82 and the second motor switch 71 is checked.
Next, it is determined whether the next operation shift condition is satisfied (step A50). The target control information is not time value control, but the motor control information table is set, the table address corresponding to the control information is calculated, the address of the switch control area of the motor switch to be monitored, monitoring bit data, Since the determination data is acquired and the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, it is determined whether it is possible to shift to the next operation.

If the next operation shift condition is not satisfied (step A50; NO), the process jumps to step A70 (FIG. 62). On the other hand, if the next operation shift condition is satisfied (step A50; YES), the target number of ball catching processes is cleared to "0" (step A51). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball biting error has already been canceled (step A52), and if the ball biting error has already been canceled (step A52; YES), the process jumps to step A56.
On the other hand, if the ball catching error has not already been released (step A 52; NO), the process proceeds to step A 53 to save the title error cancellation flag in the target title error status flag area (step A 53). Prepare an object error cancellation command (step A54). Next, an effect command setting process is performed (step A55). As a result, the state of the motor switch to be monitored is checked using the acquired data, and when the transition condition to the next operation is satisfied, the number of ball catching processings of the target is cleared to "0", The target item error cancellation command is sent to the effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the item error cancellation command is displayed on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300 (for example, the ball bite error of the item ) Is displayed. After step A55, the process proceeds to step A56.

In step A56, the control pointer of interest is loaded (step A56), and it is determined whether the loaded control pointer is for performing a ball bite return operation (step A57). If the control pointer performs the ball bite return operation (step A57; YES), the target ball bite processing flag is cleared (step A58), and the target ball bite return pointer is loaded as the control pointer (step A58) A59). After step A59, the process proceeds to step A60.
On the other hand, if the control pointer does not perform the ball bite return operation (step A57; NO), the process jumps to step A60.
At step A60, the address of the motor operation table corresponding to the control pointer is calculated (step A60), the control pointer is obtained (step A61), the control timer is obtained and saved in the target control timer area (step A62).

Next, control information is acquired and saved in the target control information area (step A63), excitation information is acquired, saved in the target excitation information area (step A64), and the target excitation timer area is cleared (step A64) A65).
Here, the excitation information is information that excites the target motor (the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71), that is, turns on (rotational drive).
Next, it is determined whether the control information is time value control (step A66). This is to determine the target control information for controlling the value of time when performing motor control. If the target control information is time value control (step A66; YES), the process jumps to step A69. Then, in step A69, the no update code is saved in the target ball bit next pointer area (step A69), and the process proceeds to step A70.
On the other hand, if the control information is not time value control (step A66; NO), the process proceeds to step A67, the ball biting next pointer is acquired and saved in the target ball biting next pointer area (step A67). Then, the control pointer before update is saved in the target ball bite return pointer area (step A68), and then the process proceeds to step A70.
Here, the processing from step A60 to step A68 is to set the value of the return point when returning from the ball bite processing.

When the process proceeds from step A68 or step A69 to step A70, it is determined whether the target excitation timer is "0" (step A70). If the target excitation timer is not "0" (step A70; NO), the target excitation timer is updated "-1" (step A71), and it is determined whether the target excitation timer has become "0". (Step A72). If the target excitation timer is "0" (step A72; YES), the process proceeds to step A73.
On the other hand, if the target excitation timer is "0" (step A70; YES), the process jumps to step A73.
If the target excitation timer is determined to be "0" in step A70, or if the target excitation timer is determined to be "0" in step A72, since the target excitation timer is "0" in all cases, step A73. Then, it is determined whether the target excitation information is stop information (step A73). If the target excitation information is stop information (step A73; YES), the output off data is saved in the target excitation data area (step A74), and then the motor operation editing process is ended.

On the other hand, if the target excitation information is not the stop information (step A73; NO), the process proceeds to step A75 to set the motor excitation information table (step A75) and calculate the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation information. (Step A76), the excitation timer is acquired, and saved in the target excitation timer area (step A77).
Next, an excitation counter addition value is acquired and added to the target excitation counter (step A 78). Next, the value after addition is corrected to the range of "0" to "3" (step A79).
Here, when the target motor (the first motor switch 82 or the second motor switch 71) rotates clockwise (CW), “+1” and “+2” are addition values, and the motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW). In the case, "-1" and "-2" are added values.
This is because, for example, when the ball bite occurs, the accessory motor 81 of the first accessory device 51 is reversely rotated or positively rotated, and the space between the bridge main body 80 and the inner wall surface of the first accessory device 51 or the like is generated. The ball biting is eliminated by performing processing such as increasing the interval of
In addition, for example, the ball motor 72 of the heaven character apparatus 66 is reversely rotated or positively rotated to increase the distance between the heaven rotator 67 and the inner wall surface of the heaven character apparatus 66, etc. It is for the bite to be eliminated.
After step A79, the process proceeds to step A80, the corrected value is saved in the target excitation counter area (step A80), and the motor excitation data table is set (step A81). Next, the address of the table corresponding to the target excitation counter is calculated (step A82), and then output data is acquired and saved in the target excitation data area (step A83). After step A83, the motor operation editing process is ended.

[Feature presentation command editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a description will be given of an object effect command editing process (step S75) in the timer interrupt process.
As shown in FIG. 62, in the prize effect command editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a prize effect flag is in effect (step A91). If the combination effect flag is not in effect (step A91; NO), the combination effect command editing process is ended.
On the other hand, if the combination effect flag is in effect (step A91; YES), the combination effect command timer is updated by “−1” (step A92). Next, it is determined whether or not the prize effect command timer is "0" (step A93), and if the timer is not "0" (step A93; NO), the prize effect command editing process is ended. Do.
On the other hand, if the feature effect command timer is "0" (step A93; YES), it is determined whether or not the item effect control information instructs "start of effect" (step A94). If the feature presentation control information instructs "start of presentation" (step A94; YES), the process proceeds to step A95, and the process from step A95 to step A98 is performed to start the presentation.-Also, the prize presentation control information If the command does not instruct "start of effect" (step A94; NO), the process proceeds to step A99, and the process regarding the end of effect is performed in the following steps A99 to A103.

If the feature presentation control information indicates "production start" (step A94; YES), and proceeds to step A95, first, prepare a feature presentation start command (step A95), rendering command setting processing (Step A96). As a result, it is sent to the feature effect start command effect control device 300, and the effect display corresponding to the feature effect start command is started on the information display 45 by the control of the effect control device 300.
Next, the effect time (for example, set to 1600 ms as the timer initial value for effect time) is saved in the feature effect command timer area (step A97), and the effect end waiting information is saved in the effect effect control information area ( Step A98).
For example, when the effect presentation of the first character object device 51 is started by the processing of step A97 and step A98, when the effect time (for example, 1600 ms described above) elapses, the character object motor in the first character object device 51 Rotational driving of 81 is started, and the bridge main body 80 of the seesaw structure starts to tilt to the side of the hell inflow space 63 (left side). After passing through step A98, the feature presentation command editing process is ended.

On the other hand, if the feature presentation control information does not instruct "start of presentation" (step A94; NO), and proceeds to step A99, first, prepare a command of ending the attraction presentation (step A99), A command setting process is performed (step A100). As a result, it is sent to the feature effect end command effect control device 300, the control of the effect control device 300 causes the information display 45 to end the effect display corresponding to the feature effect end command.
Then, the feature effect flag area is cleared (step A101), and the feature effect command timer area is cleared (step A102). Next, the feature effect control information area is cleared (step A103).
For example, in the case where the effect presentation of the first character device 51 is ended by the processing of step A102 and step A103, the rotational drive of the character motor 81 in the first character device 51 is ended, and the bridge main body of the seesaw structure The up and down drive of 80 will be stopped. After step A103, the feature presentation command editing process is ended.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S76) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the left count switch (step A111). This is whether the game control apparatus 100 has an input signal from the left large winning opening switch 103 (the left count switch, hereinafter the same) detecting a winning on the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left large winning Whether the mouth switch 103 has detected a winning on the variable winning device 35).
Here, in order to detect gaming balls flowing into the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35, the left large winning opening switch 103 and the right large winning opening switch 104 (see FIG. 11) are provided, and the variation winning In order to detect the game ball discharged from the device 35 to the outside, a left residual ball outlet switch 112 and a right residual ball outlet switch 113 are provided.
In this case, it is the remaining ball to monitor whether the gaming ball that has won the fluctuation winning device 35 escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 and remains in the fluctuation winning device 35 internally. Monitoring function.
In the present embodiment, the above mechanism is utilized as an abnormal discharge monitoring function separately from the residual ball monitoring function. That is, apart from monitoring whether or not remaining in the variable winning device 35, although the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, the left residual ball outlet switch 112 or When the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detects the discharge of the game ball, it is an abnormal discharge, for example, an incorrect winning on the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left large winning opening switch 103 or the right large winning opening switch 104 plays Even though the winning of the ball is not detected, the discharge of the remaining ball is detected.
The abnormal discharge monitoring process shown in FIG. 64 is to monitor abnormal discharge of the gaming ball as described above (for example, improper winning of the variable winning device 35).

Returning to the flow, if there is an input to the left count switch (step A111; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “+1” (step A112), and then the process proceeds to step A113. On the other hand, if there is no input on the left count switch (step A111; NO), the process jumps to step A113.
In step A113, it is determined whether there is an input to the right count switch (step A113). This is whether the game control apparatus 100 has an input signal from the right large winning opening switch 104 (the right count switch, hereinafter the same) detecting a winning on the variable winning device 35 (that is, the right large winning Whether the mouth switch 104 has detected a winning on the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the right count switch (step A113; YES), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by “+1” (step A114), and then the process proceeds to step A115. On the other hand, if there is no input to the right count switch (step A113; NO), the process jumps to step A115.

When the process proceeds to step A115, it is determined whether there is an input to the left residual ball discharge port switch 112 (step A115). This is whether the game control apparatus 100 has an input signal from the left residual ball discharge port switch 112 detecting a state in which the game ball is discharged to the outside from the hell inflow space 63 of the variable winning device 35 (that is, left) Whether the remaining ball discharge port switch 112 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the left residual ball discharge port switch 112 (step A115; YES), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A116).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is “0”, the left residual ball discharge port switch 112 is the game ball even though there is no winning on the variable winning device 35 through the above-described processing of steps A111 to A114. There has been a possibility that, for example, an incorrect winning on the variable winning device 35 has been detected. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A116; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not "0" (step A116; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by "-1" (step A117), and then the process proceeds to step A118.
If there is no input to the left residual ball outlet switch 112 (step A115; NO), the process jumps to step A118.

In step A118, it is determined whether there is an input to the right residual ball outlet switch 113 (step A118). This is whether the game control apparatus 100 has an input signal from the right remaining ball discharge port switch 113 detecting a state in which the game ball is discharged to the outside from the heaven inflow space 62 of the variable winning device 35 (that is, right Whether the remaining ball discharge port switch 113 has detected a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 35).
If there is an input to the right residual ball discharge port switch 113 (step A118; YES), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A119).
Here, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0", there is no winning in the variable winning device 35 through the above-described processing of steps A111 to A114, or there is a winning in the variable winning device 35, but the left Discharge of the game ball is detected by the remaining ball discharge port switch 112, and the abnormal discharge counter returns to "0", and the right remaining ball discharge is performed despite the fact that the winning processing has been completed properly. Since the exit switch 113 has detected the discharge of the game ball, there is a possibility of, for example, an incorrect winning on the variable winning device 35. Therefore, if the abnormal discharge counter is "0" (step A119; YES), the process branches to step A121.
On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge counter is not "0" (step A119; NO), the abnormal discharge counter is updated by "-1" (step A120), and then the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
Also, even when there is no input to the right residual ball discharge port switch 112 (step A112; NO), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.

If it is determined that there is a possibility of abnormal discharge and the process proceeds to step A121, an abnormal discharge error flag area is prepared (step A121) and an abnormal discharge generation command is prepared (step A122). Next, a game stop error status update process is performed (step A123). As a result, an abnormal discharge error flag is set, and a game state of abnormal discharge occurrence is entered based on the abnormal discharge occurrence command, the gaming stop error status is updated, and an error notification is issued. After passing through step A123, the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
As described above, even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open, when the left residual ball outlet switch 112 and the right residual ball outlet switch 113 detect the discharge of the game ball, it is abnormal discharge. Yes, for example, incorrect winnings on the variable winning device 35 (that is, the left big winning opening switch 103 and the right big winning opening switch 104 do not detect the winning of the game ball, but the discharge of the remaining balls is detected Therefore, the game stop error status is updated.

[Game stop error status update processing]
Next, a game stop error status update process (step A123) in the abnormal discharge monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the game stop error status update process, first, an error occurring flag is saved in the target error flag area (step A131), and it is determined whether or not an error to stop the game has occurred. (Step A132). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A132; NO), the game stop error status update process is ended. Therefore, in this case, a serious error such as stopping the game has occurred, and the game is stopped.
On the other hand, if an error to stop the game has not occurred (step A132; YES), the error operation flag is saved in the game stop error state area (step A133). Next, a timer initial value (for example, 10 s) is saved in the game stop error control timer area (step A134). Next, rendering command setting processing is performed (step A135). As a result, the prepared error command is sent to the effect control device 300, and under the control of the effect control device 300, an error effect display corresponding to the error command prepared by the information display 45 is performed.

Fraud monitoring process
Next, the fraud monitoring process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the fraud monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (step A141). This is to determine whether or not the magnetic sensor 115 is already turned on to detect an abnormal magnetism (i.e., the occurrence of a magnet fraud).
If the magnet fraud has not occurred (step A141; NO), it is determined whether the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A142). This is because the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 115 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) when the magnet is not illegally generated. In other words, it is determined whether or not a magnet irregularity has occurred.
If the magnetic sensor 115 is on (step A142; YES), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step A143), It is determined whether the timer has timed up (for example, determined in 32 ms) (step A 144).

If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out (step A144; YES), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms), the magnet fraud flag region is prepared (step A145) and the magnet A fraud generation command is prepared (step A146), and then the game stop error status update correction is performed (step A147). As a result, the prepared magnet fraud occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and an error effect display corresponding to the magnet fraud occurrence command is performed by the information display 45 under the control of the effect control device 300. . After step A147, the process proceeds to step A148.
On the other hand, if the magnet irregularity is occurring at step A141 (step A141; YES), the processing at step A142 to step A147 has already been executed, so the process jumps to step A148.
Also, if the magnetic sensor 115 is not on (step A142; NO), the magnetic sensor 115 does not turn on when the magnet fraud is not generated, so it is determined that the magnet fraud does not occur, and the magnet fraud monitoring is performed. The timer is cleared (step A149). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A148.
Furthermore, if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out in the above step A144 (step A144; NO), the process jumps to step A148 to repeat the routine.

In step A148, it is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148). This is because whether the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on, that is, an abnormal radio wave to the game board 30 is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 114 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3) That is, it is determined whether a board radio wave has occurred.
If the board radio wave sensor 114 is on (step A148; YES), that is, if an abnormal board radio wave is detected, a board radio wave fraud flag area is prepared (step A150), and a board radio wave fraud occurrence command is prepared ( Step A151) Then, the game stop error status update correction is performed (step A152). As a result, the prepared board radio wave illegal occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and under the control of the effect control device 300, an error effect display corresponding to the board radio wave illegal occurrence command is performed by the information display 45. become. After step A152, the process proceeds to step A1153.
On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 114 is not on (step A148; NO), that is, if no abnormal board radio wave is detected, the process jumps to step A153.

When the process proceeds to step A153, it is determined whether the glass frame or the body frame is being opened (step A153). This is because opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117, and it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is in progress based on, for example, whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set. Similarly, the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and it is determined whether or not the main body frame opening error is in progress based on, for example, whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame or the main body frame is being opened (step A153; YES), the timer initial value is saved in the vibration fraud monitoring invalid timer area (step A154). For example, 3s is set as this timer initial value. Therefore, the vibration for 3 seconds after the closing of the glass frame 5 or the main body frame 4 is not treated as a vibration improper treatment. After step A154, the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the glass frame or the main body frame is not open (step A153; NO), the process jumps to step A155.

When the process proceeds to step A155, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalidation timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A155). Next, it is determined whether the vibration fraud monitoring invalidation timer is "0" (step A156), and if the vibration fraud monitoring invalidation timer is not "0" (step A156; NO), the fraud monitoring processing is ended. Repeat the routine.
On the other hand, if the vibration fraud monitoring invalidation timer is "0" (step A156; YES), it is determined whether the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A157). This is from the state of the detection signal output from the vibration sensor 116 and taken into the third input port 163 (input port 3), whether the vibration sensor 116 is on, that is, has detected an incorrect vibration on the game board 30 (that is, Whether or not vibration positive has occurred).
If the vibration sensor 116 is not on (step A157; NO), that is, if the incorrect vibration is not detected, the fraud monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if the vibration sensor 116 is on (step A157; YES), that is, if an incorrect vibration is detected, it is determined whether the special figure small hit is in progress (step A158). If the special figure small hit is not in progress (step A158; NO), the fraud monitoring process is ended.
If the special figure small hit is in progress (step A158; YES), it is determined that the vibration is illegal and the process proceeds to step A159 to prepare a vibration illegal flag area. This is because in the special figure small hit, the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 is performed, so the V formed on the heaven rotator 67 in the heavenly prize device 66 at that time. Because the game board 30 is hit and vibrated with the intention of hitting the game balls of the winning recesses 68a and 68b and aiming at a big hit, the vibration sensor 116 is particularly in the special figure small hit. This is because it is determined that the vibration is on when the vibration is on.
Then, a vibration fraud occurrence command is prepared (step A160), and then the game stop error status update correction is performed (step A161). As a result, the prepared incorrect vibration occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300, and under the control of the effect control device 300, an error effect display corresponding to the incorrect vibration occurrence command is performed by the information display 45. . After passing through step A161, the fraud monitoring process is ended.

Launch control processing
Next, the launch control process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 67, in the firing control process, it is first determined whether an error to stop the game has occurred (step A171). If an error to stop the game has occurred (step A171; YES), it is determined whether the special figure game is in the special figure power on operation process (step A172). If the special view game is in the special view power on operation process (step A172; YES), the process branches to step A175 to save the output data of the firing stop in the launch permission signal area (step A175). As a result, the firing of the game balls is stopped. After passing through step A175, the emission control process is ended.
This is because in the power-on operation process, the game is performed such that the product motor 81 in the first character apparatus 51 and the product motor 72 in the heaven character apparatus 66 are returned to their initial positions when the power is turned on. This is to stop the firing of the game ball when the special figure game is in the special figure power on operation process, since it is in a state where it can start.

If the special view game is not in the special view power on operation process (step A172; NO), the process proceeds to step A173 to determine whether the ball catching process of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is in progress.
Here, the motor 1 refers to the accessory motor 81, and the motor 2 refers to the accessory motor 72. If the ball bite processing of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is in progress (step A173; YES), the process branches to step A175 to save the output data of the firing stop in the firing permission signal area (step A175). As a result, the firing of the game balls is stopped. After passing through step A175, the emission control process is ended.
This is because, for example, when the ball bite occurs in the first character device 51 or the heaven character device 66, the character motor 81 of the first character device 51 is reversely rotated, and the bridge body 80 and the first character are played. A process such as widening the space between the object device 51 and the inner wall surface etc. is performed to eliminate the bite of the ball, or, for example, the object motor 72 of the heaven character device 66 is reversely rotated. In order to stop the firing of the game ball during such ball bite processing, by performing processing such as widening the interval between the inner wall surface of the heavenly prize product device 66 etc. is there.

If the ball bite processing of the motor 1 or the motor 2 is not being performed (step A173; NO), the process proceeds to step A174 to save output data of the release permission in the release permission signal area (step A174). As a result, the launch of the gaming ball is permitted. After passing through step A174, the launch control process is ended. Therefore, the error to stop the game does not occur (step A171; YES), the special figure game is not in the special figure power on operation process (step A173; NO), and the ball bite processing of motor 1 or motor 2 If not (step A; NO), the launch of the gaming ball is permitted.
On the other hand, if an error to stop the game occurs in step A171 (step A171; NO), the process branches to step A175 to save the output data of the firing stop in the firing permission signal area (step A175). As a result, the firing of the gaming balls is stopped. After passing through step A175, the emission control process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the external information editing process (step S79) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring result of payout command transmission process (step S65), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S67), remaining ball monitoring process (step A68), fraud monitoring process (step S77), etc. And processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game arcade internal management device or a test shot test device and setting the information in an output buffer.
As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (step A181). This is because opening of the glass frame 5 is detected by the glass frame opening detection switch 117, and it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring based on, for example, whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step A181; NO), it is then determined whether the body frame opening error is occurring (step A182). This is because opening of the main body frame 4 is detected by the main body frame opening detection switch 118, and for example, it is determined whether a main body frame opening error is occurring based on whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set.
If the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step A182; NO), the process proceeds to step A183, and the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A183). The door / frame open signal is an open signal of the glass frame 5 (door) and the front frame 4 (frame). As a result, the off data of the door / frame open signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A184). As a result, off data of the security signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A184, the process proceeds to step A185.

On the other hand, if a glass frame opening error is occurring (step A181; YES) or if a body frame opening error is occurring (step A182; YES), the process branches to step A186 in any case, and the door The on data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A186). As a result, the on data of the door / frame open signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152.
Next, the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A187). This is to output the gaming machine error status signal to the outside when the gaming machine error status of opening the door or frame occurs. As a result, the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A187, the process proceeds to step A185.

In step A185, if the security signal control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. The security signal control timer is for turning on the security signal for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and a timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer has become "0" (step A188). The security signal control timer is for turning on the security signal for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and for example, 256 ms is set as the timer initial value in the process of setting the RAM initial value (for example, step S27). Is set.
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step A188; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, it is determined whether or not the frame radio wave illegality is occurring ( Step A189).
If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step A189; NO), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A190). As a result, off data of the security signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A190, the process proceeds to step A191.
On the other hand, if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step A189; YES), the process branches to step A192, and the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A192). As a result, the on data of the security signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A192, the process proceeds to step A191.

In step A191, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191). Here, the switch abnormality occurrence is an error such as a connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 or the switch abnormality detection signal 2 described above. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is output when an abnormality of a sensor or a switch is detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121b.
An error such as connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 1 is referred to as "error 1". Further, an error such as connector disconnection based on the switch abnormality detection signal 2 is referred to as “abnormal 2”.
In the process of step A191, it is determined that a switch abnormality is occurring even if either “abnormal 1” or “abnormal 2” occurs.
If a switch abnormality is not occurring (step A191; NO), it is then determined whether an accessory error is occurring (step A193).
In the present embodiment, two target character devices 51 and 66 are provided as target character devices, and among them, the first character device 51 has a character motor 81 (first motor ), And the bonus character motor 66 (second motor) is positioned in the heavenly character apparatus 66. Therefore, it is determined that the accessory error is occurring even if any error of the accessory motor 81 (first motor) or the accessory motor 72 (second motor) occurs. Do.

If an item error is not occurring (step A193; NO), it is then determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194).
In the present embodiment, it is monitored whether the gaming ball that has won the fluctuation winning device 35 escapes from the heaven inflow space 62 and the hell inflow space 63 to the outside and remains in the fluctuation winning device 35 or not. A left residual ball outlet switch 112 and a right residual ball outlet switch 113 are provided in order to detect game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 35 (the details will be described later). As mentioned above). Then, if there are remaining balls in the variable winning device 35 even after a predetermined period or more, it is determined that a remaining ball error is occurring.
If a residual ball error is not occurring (step A194; NO), the process proceeds to step A195.
On the other hand, if a switch abnormality is occurring (step A191; YES), if an accessory error is occurring (step A193; YES), or if a remaining ball error is occurring (step A194; YES), then either If at least one determination is YES, the process proceeds to step A196, and the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A196). This is to output a gaming machine error status signal to the outside when a gaming machine error status occurs such as during a switch abnormality, during an accessory error, or during a residual ball error. As a result, the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A196, the process proceeds to step A195.

When the process proceeds to step A195, it includes step A195, and the following determination processing is performed in each of steps A197, A198, A199, and A200.
(A) Step A195: It is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring.
(B) Step A197: It is determined whether or not the magnet irregularity is occurring.
(Iii) Step A198: It is determined whether or not the board radio wave fraud is occurring.
(D) Step A199: It is determined whether or not the vibration irregularity is occurring.
(E) Step A200: It is determined whether or not the special winning opening fraud is occurring.
The abnormal discharge in step A195 means that the left residual ball outlet switch 112 and the right residual ball outlet switch 113 detect the discharge of gaming balls even though the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are not open. It is anomalous and is caused by an incorrect winning act on the variable winning device 35.
The magnet fraud in step A197 is the case where the magnetic sensor 115 is turned on and abnormal magnetism is detected continuously for a fixed period (for example, 32 ms).
The board radio wave fraud in step A198 is a case where the board radio wave sensor 114 is turned on and an abnormal radio wave to the game board 30 is detected.
The vibration fraud in step A199 is a case where the vibration sensor 116 is turned on and a fraudulent vibration on the game board 30 is detected.
The special winning opening in step A200 is a case where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 as a special winning opening are opened illegally to win a game ball.
It should be noted that the judgment of occurrence of these abnormalities is made, for example, based on whether an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set or not.

Next, if the determination result in step A195 is NO, the determination result in step A197 is NO, the determination result in step A198 is NO, the determination result in step A199 is NO, and the determination result in step A200 is NO, the process proceeds to step A201. The off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A201). Here, it is for outputting a gaming machine error status signal representing that a gaming machine error status such as abnormal ejection, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, or big winning opening fraud has not occurred. As a result, off data of the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A201, the process proceeds to step A204.
On the other hand, if at least one of steps A195, A197, A198, A199 and A200 has a step of determining YES, the process branches to step A202. This is to notify the outside when the determination result that at least one of the step A195, the step A197, the step A198, the step A199, and the step A200 indicates that the fraud is occurring.
At step A202, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A202). As a result, the on data of the security signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. Next, the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A203). This is to output the gaming machine error status signal to the outside when any one of the gaming machine error status among the abnormal ejection, the magnet fraud, the board radio wave fraud, the vibration fraud, and the big winning opening fraud occurs. is there. As a result, the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal board 152. After step A203, the process proceeds to step A204.

In step A204, the address of the main prize ball signal control area is prepared (step A204), and the on data of the main prize ball signal is prepared (step A205), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A206). ). This is because the game control apparatus 100 outputs one pulse of the main winning ball signal every time the number of winning balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here, 10). To edit the signal.
Next, the address of the combination product number signal control area is prepared (step A207), and the on data of the combination product number signal is prepared (step A208), and then the pulse signal editing process is performed (step A209). This is to edit the signal such that one pulse of the winning combination winning signal is output in the game control device 100 every time the winning combination is counted. It is to be noted that the winning combination is a winning on the variable winning device 35 as a large winning opening.

Next, an address of the starting opening 1 signal control area is prepared (step A210), and ON data of the starting opening 1 signal is prepared (step A211), and then pulse signal editing processing is performed (step A212). This is to edit the signal such that one pulse of the starting opening 1 signal is output in the game control apparatus 100 every time the winning opening to the starting opening 1 is counted. The starting opening 1 signal is a signal corresponding to the winning of the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b.
Next, an address of the start opening 2 signal control area is prepared (step A213), and ON data of the start opening 2 signal is prepared (step A214), and then pulse signal editing processing is performed (step A215). This is to edit the signal such that one pulse of the starting opening 2 signal is output in the game control device 100 every time the starting opening 2 is counted for winning. The starting opening 2 signal is a signal corresponding to a winning on the second starting winning opening 34.

Next, if the role control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A216). The role number control timer is a timer for performing control for outputting a signal for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) each time the special winning opening is opened (that is, the opening of the special winning opening in the starting game). Therefore, the bonus item release number signal is output as one pulse when it is opened once in the start game, and as two pulses when it is opened twice. Next, it is determined whether or not the number-of-parts control timer is "0" (step A217). If the number-of-parts control timer is "0" (step A217; YES), off data of the number-of-parts signal Are saved in the external information output data area (step A218). As a result, off data of the number-of-characters signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal plate 152. After passing through step A218, the external information editing process is ended.
On the other hand, if the part number control timer is not "0" (step A217; NO), the on data of the number part signal is saved in the external information output data area (step A219). As a result, the on data of the character number signal is output to the outside through the external information terminal plate 152. After step A219, the external information editing process is ended.

[Pulse signal editing process]
Next, pulse signal editing processing (steps A206, A209, A212, and A215) in the external information editing processing will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 70, in the pulse signal editing process, first, if the output control timer of the target signal is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A231). The minimum value of the output control timer of the target signal is set to “0”.
Among the target signals, which of the main prize ball signal, combination prize number signal, starting opening 1 signal, and starting opening 2 signal described in FIG. 69 is the editing target of the current pulse signal editing process Signal that points to
Next, it is determined whether the value of the output control timer of the target signal is "0" (step A232). Then, if the value of the output control timer of the target signal is "0" (step A232; YES), it is then determined whether the number of times of output of the target signal is "0" (step A233) . If the number of outputs of the target signal is not "0" (step A233; NO), the number of outputs of the target signal is updated by "-1" (step A234).
Next, the main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is saved in the output control timer area of the target signal (step A235). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the target signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A236), and the pulse signal editing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the number of outputs of the target signal is “0” (step A233; YES), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step A238) The pulse signal editing process ends.
If the value of the output control timer of the target signal is not "0" (step A232; NO), it is determined whether the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on period (step A237). Note that the output control timer of the target signal being in the output ON period means that the value of the output control timer of the target signal is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the output control timer of the target signal is in the output on period (step A 237; YES), the process proceeds to step A 236. When the output control timer of the target signal is not in the output on period (step A 237; NO), the off data for turning off the target signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. (Step A235) The pulse signal editing process is ended.

Here, a specific example of the pulse signal editing process in the case where the target signal is, for example, the main winning ball signal will be described. The same pulse signal editing process is performed even when the target signal is the combination prize number signal other than the main winning ball signal, the starting opening 1 signal, and the starting opening 2 signal.
That is, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is an external device (for example, an external device (e.g. Output to the The payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse winning ball signal generated every 10 pieces to the external device (for example, an external management device).
That is, the main prize ball number signal output frequency is updated by “+1” (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 pieces of payout schedule (every time the payout command is transmitted) by the game control apparatus 100 (main substrate). The main prize ball number signal is output as many times as the number of outputs updated (set). Then, for the main prize ball signal output for every 10 pieces of the delivery schedule as described above, the payout ball signal is transmitted from the delivery control device 200 (delivery substrate) when the 10 pieces of delivery are actually performed. By adjusting the schedule and results, it is possible to respond to fraudulent payouts.

Also, from the main prize ball signal, it becomes possible to determine by the management device as an external device when it is a prize that has been generated, which also helps the policy in hall sales.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurred during a big hit or a winning occurred during a normal game. For example, if there is a lot of winning if it is a big hit in the big hit, but there is a lot of winning in the normal game, there is an effect that it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet, etc. become.
On the other hand, if there is only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 which is outputted at the completion of the payout and the main prize ball signal is not outputted to the external device, the ball will run out during the big hit and the payout will be made. It is not possible to determine when the prize has been generated, for example, when it is after the big hit that the supply is delayed and paid out after the big hit.
Therefore, if the supply is delayed and paid out after the big hit, there will be a lot of winnings (payouts) during the normal game, and it is possible for the business data to be defective etc. There is sex.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, both the main winning ball signal and the winning ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main winning ball signal is output immediately after winning, so There are no problems.

[Transmission timing chart of main prize ball signal]
Next, a specific example of the transmission of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG.
In FIG. 71, when the target signal is the main prize ball signal, the main prize ball signal is an external device (for example, a main prize ball signal having one pulse for every ten prize balls from the game control device 100). , External management device).
Here, for the main prize ball signal of one pulse, as shown in FIG. 71 as the main prize ball signal as an output signal, the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal is 128 ms, A signal of one pulse is formed in such a manner that the time of the off state (for example, low level) of the main prize ball signal is 64 ms. Therefore, 128 ms + 64 ms = 192 ms in one whole pulse.
The value of the output control timer of the main prize ball signal of interest is "48" at the timing when the main prize ball signal turns on, "16" at the timing when the main prize ball signal turns off, and the main prize ball signal off. It becomes "0" at the timing of the final point in time when it continues.

In this manner, one pulse of the main prize ball signal is formed in the mode as shown in FIG. 71, and in the game control apparatus 100, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out is one pulse of ten main sphere signals to external devices It will be output. The payout control device 200 also outputs a 1-pulse winning ball signal generated every 10 pieces to the external device.
Therefore, the game control apparatus 100 (main substrate) outputs a main prize ball signal of one pulse every 10 pieces of delivery schedule (every time a delivery command is transmitted), and 10 pieces are actually from the delivery control device 200 (delivery substrate) When a payout is made, a prize ball signal is transmitted, and by matching the schedule and the result, it is possible to cope with an incorrect payout.
In addition, even if the prize was won during the big hit period, it was not possible to judge whether it was a big hit by the big hit only with the conventional winning ball signal, when the payout was delayed due to lack of balls and the payout was made after the big hit end. However, in the present embodiment, the addition of the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning enables the management apparatus of the hall to collect (determine) accurate information.

E. Outline of Game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and the flow of the game will be described.
At the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), it is in the customer waiting state (during demo), and a command to instruct display of the customer waiting screen is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, On the information display 45, an effect waiting for a customer is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the firing operation handle 11 to start the game, the gaming ball at the firing position is driven into the game area 32 via the guide rail 31, and the driven gaming ball is first started When winning in any of the winning openings 33a, 33b, while the variable display of the special view 1 is performed in the collective display device 50, the variable display of the decorative special view is performed in the information display 45. In addition, the ball removed without winning in the first start winning opening 33a, 33b flows into the out hole 37.
After the special view 1 of the collective display device 50 changes for a predetermined time by winning in any of the first start winning openings 33a, 33b, a small hit occurs based on the result pattern of the stop symbol, and the change winning device The movable members 43a and 43b at 35 (big winning opening) perform the operation of opening once or opening twice.

Also, when the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 34, the special view 2 of the collective display device 50 fluctuates for a predetermined time, and the movable member 43a of the fluctuation winning device 35 in the result mode of all stop symbols. , 43b perform the opening operation twice.
In addition, small hit is opening of big winning a prize opening (fluctuation winning a prize device 35 fluctuation) when winning in the starting winning a prize mouth (the thing of all the starting winning a prize mouth of the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 33a, 33b, 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 34) It is an operation from the opening of the movable members 43a and 43b of the winning device 35 through the special winning area 69 to the V winning and the winning of the big hit, but if the V winning is not made, It becomes until winning a prize winning opening (fluctuation winning device 35).
As described above, in the case of a small hit of opening once, the movable members 43a and 43b perform an opening operation (conversion to the second state), and close again after a predetermined time has elapsed (here, 0.5 seconds has elapsed). The opening operation of the predetermined mode of operating is performed once. In the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the closing operation of the predetermined mode (here, the opening operation of 0.8 seconds) for the predetermined time (here, 0.8 seconds). Will be held twice.
Furthermore, when the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 34 (second starting opening), the holding of the special drawing (the holding of the special drawing 2) is performed for only one. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 33a, 33b (first start opening), the suspension of the special figure (without the suspension of special figure 1) is not performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when winning in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), the results of the variable display of the special view 1 or the special view 2 in the collective display device 50 are all It is a small hit and there is no detachment. That is, when the start winning is performed, the opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b in the fluctuation winning device 35 is always performed, and the opening number of the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 due to the difference in the stop symbol of the special view 1 or 2 Are different.
In the small hit operation, there are cases where the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 open once and when the movable members 43a and 43b open twice, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). 46A shows the case where the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation once as a small hit, and FIG. 46B shows the case where the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation twice as the small hit.
As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation once, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state), and a predetermined time has elapsed. A predetermined mode of opening operation, such as closing operation again after (here, after 400 ms), is performed once. Therefore, in the case of one-time opening, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open for only 400 ms, and within this period, the game ball can be awarded to the variable winning device 35. A hit action is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), when the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 perform the opening operation twice, the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation (conversion to the second state). After a lapse of time (in this case, 400 ms), the opening operation of the predetermined mode such as closing operation is repeated twice. In this case, the first open period of the movable members 43a and 43b is, for example, 400 ms, and subsequently, the movable members 43a and 43b are closed after 400 ms, and then a predetermined wait time (1000 ms) is provided. Then, the movable members 43a and 43b continue closing, and the second opening operation of the movable members 43a and 43b is performed simultaneously with the end of the predetermined weight time. The opening period of the second movable members 43a and 43b is also, for example, 400 m. Therefore, in the case of opening twice, the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are open for only 400 ms, and the operation is performed twice with a predetermined wait time interposed. Then, a small hit operation is performed in a mode in which winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning device 35 is possible within a period when the opening operation is performed twice.

When the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 perform the opening operation one or two times by the small hitting operation, the game balls move at the timing when the movable members 43a and 43b perform the opening operation. The game ball that has flowed into the space comes into contact with the bridge body 80 of the first character object device 51 of the seesaw structure, and depending on the inclination of the bridge body 80, the game ball is inflow space on the left and right (heaven inflow space 62 Flows into any of 63).
At this time, since the stopper solenoid control pointer is set according to the value of the small hitting operation by the process of step S665 in the special view display process (FIG. 43), the bat member 53 in the first character apparatus 51 is The game is played to the player in an advantageous manner.
Specifically, the control of the accessory solenoid 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first accessory device 51 up and down is performed, and the gaming ball rolls over the bridge main body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and the hell An operation of driving the bat member 53 upward to block the flow into the inflow space 63 is performed. Thus, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the game ball to flow into the heaven flow-in space 62 while watching the motion of the bat member 53 blocking the flow into the hell flow-in space 63. it can.

On the other hand, even if the bat member 53 operates as described above, the gaming balls flowing into the variable winning device 35 contact the bridge main body 80 of the first character device 51 of the seesaw structure, and the inclination state of the bridge main body 80 As a result, the game balls flow into either the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 on either side.
When the gaming ball flows into the heaven inflow space 62, the gaming ball enters the inside of the heavenly character device 66 and rotates around the heavenly rotating body 67 rotating at a constant speed, and then, the heavenly rotating body 67 Either the V-shaped recessed portions 68a, 68b are fitted or the drops fall into the inflow space 75.
Then, when the gaming ball having flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is supported by being fitted into any of the V winning depressions 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning area 69, and at this time, passes through the special winning area 69 The ball is detected by the specific area switch 111, and a lottery for a big hit is started as a V prize.
On the other hand, if the gaming ball which has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit into any of the V prize recesses 68a and 68b, the ball is released and flows into the inflow space 75 and passes through the remaining ball discharge area 70. The ball passing through the residual ball discharge area 70 is detected by the right residual ball discharge switch 113. In this case, it is not a big hit, but there is only a winning on the variable winning device 35, and there is only a predetermined number of winning balls.

By the way, when the lottery of the big hit is started as V prize, according to the lottery result of the big hit, one of the three modes of "16R big hit", "per 7R" and "per 3R" It is determined.
This situation is shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, and the jackpot display unit 211 is displayed by the board effect device 46 so as to correspond to “16R big hit”, “per 7R” and “per 3R” which are lottery results of the big hit. An effect is produced in which one of the heart big hit display unit 212 and the star big hit display unit 213 faces the front to inform the player of the current big hit.
For example, if the lottery result of the big hit is “16R big hit”, the board effect device 46 performs an effect of making the V big hit display unit 211 face the front and notifying the player of the current big hit. When it becomes "16R big hit", a round game by full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to 16 rounds. That is, the round game by full opening continues to all the rounds of the 16R big hit, and the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 are controlled to open in all the rounds. In addition, when the 16R big hit game is over, it returns to the special figure normal processing (the same applies to "per 7R" and "per 3R").

Further, if the lottery result of the big hit is “7R big hit”, the effect is displayed by the board effect device 46 so that the heart big hit display unit 212 faces the front to inform the player of the present big hit. When it becomes “7R big hit”, the round game by full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to 7 rounds. In the subsequent 8 to 16 rounds, a round game with short opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed. In the short opening, the opening time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 is short, and it becomes a round substantially without balls.
Even when the heart big hit display unit 212 is selected, a rank up release may be performed to be promoted to a V big hit equivalent to “16R big hit” during round production or during interval production.
In the rank-up opening, as shown in FIG. 52, the rank-up opening operation is performed in the 8th round (the 7th round of the big hit substantially because the first round is excluded) in the case of a hit appearing 7R out of the 16R big hit. Is done. Therefore, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly promoting to a 16R jackpot is performed, and a so-called 16R jackpot rank up game is performed.

Furthermore, if the lottery result of the big hit is "3R big hit", the effect is displayed by the board effect device 46 to notify the player of the current big hit with the star big hit display section 213 facing the front. When it becomes "3R big hit", the round game by full opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed up to 3 rounds. In the subsequent 4 to 16 rounds, a round game with short opening as shown in FIG. 52 is performed. In the short opening, the opening time of the movable members 43a and 43b of the variable winning device 35 is short, and it becomes a round substantially without balls.
Even when the star big hit display portion 213 is selected, it may be promoted to a V big hit equivalent to "16 R big hit" or a heart big hit equivalent to "per 7 R" during the round effect or during the interval effect.
In the rank-up opening, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of the 16R big hit, if it is the 3R hit, it is a big hit with the rank-up opening operation performed in the fourth round (substantially the third round of the big hit). Become. Therefore, during a specific round game (during a specific round), an effect of suddenly promoting to a 16R jackpot is performed, and a so-called 16R jackpot rank up game is performed.

Next, in this embodiment, driving of the seesaw-structured bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51, driving of the heaven rotator 67 of the heaven character apparatus 66, opening of the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning apparatus 35 once. Since the symbol and the distribution ratio of the double-open symbol etc. are characterized, these operations will be described in detail.
A variation pattern for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) defining, for example, the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of presentation, the presence / absence of reach condition generation, etc. in the ROM 171B of the gaming microcomputer 171 in the gaming control apparatus 100. A distribution table is stored, and one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables is, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the time setting of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66, the movable member in the fluctuation winning device 35 Patterns such as the distribution ratio of the one-time opening pattern and the two-time opening pattern of 43a and 43b are set in advance. Then, the CPU 171A refers to the fluctuation pattern distribution table to perform control to determine the fluctuation pattern.
In the variation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73, a special figure 1 variation pattern table selected when the special figure 1 varies is described.

The flow of the game balls will be described. In this embodiment, when winning in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), the special view 1 or the special view 2 in the collective display device 50 All the results of the variable display are small hits, and the opening operation of the movable members 43 a and 43 b in the variable winning device 35 is performed.
When the movable members 43a and 43b of the fluctuation winning device 35 perform the opening operation, the gaming balls can flow into the winning space 41 of the fluctuation winning device 35. Then, when the gaming balls flow into the winning space 41, they flowed The game ball contacts the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 of the seesaw structure, and the tilt of the bridge main body 80 makes the game ball either in the left or right inflow space (heaven inflow space 62, hell inflow space 63) It will flow in.
At this time, since the stopper solenoid control pointer is set in accordance with the value of the small hitting operation, the bat member 53 in the first character device 51 is driven up and down to play a game advantageous to the player. That is, the bat ball 53 is driven upward to block the game ball from rolling on the bridge body 80 of the first accessory device 51 and flowing into the hell inflow space 63. Even if the bat member 53 operates as described above, the gaming balls having flowed into the variable winning device 35 contact the bridge main body 80 of the first accessory device 51 of the seesaw structure, and depending on the inclination of the bridge main body 80, It flows into either the heaven inflow space 62 or the hell inflow space 63 on either side.

When the gaming ball flows into the heaven inflow space 62, the gaming ball enters the inside of the heavenly character device 66, and rotates around the heavenly rotating body 67 rotating at a constant speed, and then is formed in the heavenly rotating body 67 Either the V winning recesses 68a, 68b are fitted or the drops fall into the inflow space 75.
When the gaming ball having flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 is supported by being fitted into any of the V winning recesses 68a and 68b, the ball falls into the special winning region 69, and the gaming ball having dropped into the special winning region 69 is a specific region It is detected by the switch 111, and a lottery for a big hit is started as a V prize.
On the other hand, if the gaming ball which has flowed into the heaven inflow space 62 does not fit in any of the V prize recesses 68a and 68b, the ball is released and flows into the inflow space 75 and passes through the remaining ball discharge area 70. The ball passing through the discharge area 70 is detected by the right residual ball discharge switch 113, and is not a big hit, it is only a winning to the fluctuation winning device 35, and there is only a predetermined number of winning balls.

Among the flow of game balls as described above, it is the timing at which the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 of the seesaw structure is inclined (more specifically, the bridge main body 80 is inclined to the right and heaven flows into) The timing at which the game ball easily enters the space 62) and the timing of the rotation of the heaven rotator 67 of the heavenly prize product device 66 (specifically, the timing at which the game ball fits in the V prize recesses 68a and 68b formed on the heaven rotator 67). ), And when these timings are easily understood, it is easy for the player to aim for the occurrence of a big hit. And, in consideration of the timing at which the generation of the big hit is likely to be hit, firing the game ball makes it easy to be aimed at the generation of the big hit.
In this case, the player predicts the occurrence of the big hit if the driving cycle of the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 and the rotation cycle of the heavenly rotating body 67 of the heavenly prize apparatus 66 are predicted. This is because it is possible to predict whether the game ball will fit in the V winning recesses 68a and 68b if aiming at timing.
That is, there is a bias in the combination of the drive cycle of the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 and the rotation cycle of the heaven rotary body 67 of the heaven character apparatus 66, the bridge main body 80 is inclined to the right, and the game ball flows into the heaven If the V-prize recesses 68a and 68b of the heavenly rotating body 67 are rotating at a high probability of fitting the gaming ball having flowed into the heavenly inflow space 62 according to the timing of flowing into the space 62, the big hit It will be shot at. That is, there is a bias in the appearance rate of the combined position of the movement of the bridge body 80 and the motion of the heavenly rotator 67, and if there is a timing in which the big hit can be shot in the bias, it is focused and shot .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the combination of the drive cycle of the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 and the rotation cycle of the heaven rotator 67 of the heaven product apparatus 66 is analyzed. There is no bias in the appearance ratio of the combined position of the drive position of the bridge main body 80 of the first character apparatus 51 and the rotational position of the heaven rotary body 67 of the heaven character apparatus 66 even at normal timing. By setting it to be a rate, it is difficult to hit the big hit.
That is, there is no bias in the appearance rate of the combined position of the movement of the bridge body 80 and the movement of the heavenly rotator 67, virtually eliminating the timing that can hit the big hit, and at whatever timing the game ball is hit, the bridge The appearance ratio of the combined position of the drive position of the main body 80 and the rotational position of the heavenly rotating body 67 is kept almost constant and does not change.

Therefore, first, an operation by driving of the bridge main body 80 of the first character object device 51 will be described.
The first item device 51 is controlled based on the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG.
FIG. 72 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the first character object device 51.
In FIG. 72, the accessory motor 81 is a step-type motor (so-called seesaw motor) that drives the bridge main body 80 to swing like a seesaw left and right with the center as a fulcrum. Each step rotates at a speed of 8 ms, and counterclockwise rotation (CCW) also rotates at a speed of 8 ms per step.
The first motor switch 82 detects whether the accessory motor 81 tilts the bridge main body 80 to the left or right. If the bridge main body 80 is not inclined to the left or right and is substantially horizontal, the first motor switch 82 The motor switch 82 is in the light blocking state. On the other hand, when the bridge body 80 is inclined, the first motor switch 82 switches from light shielding to light transmission. By monitoring the rotation direction of the accessory motor 81 and the state of the first motor switch 82, it can be detected to which of the left and right the bridge body 80 is inclined.
The bridge body 80 has operation modes such as stop, left tilt, and right tilt.

FIG. 72 shows the movement (operation) of one cycle from when the bridge body 80 is in the left inclination to when it returns to the state in the left inclination again. When the bridge body 80 is in the left-tilted state, the accessory motor 81 is in the counterclockwise state, and the first motor switch 82 is in the light blocking state, and it is waiting for the change from light blocking to light passing. It is a state.
Then, after the bridge body 80 is temporarily stopped from this state, the movement driven so as to tilt to the right becomes the start of one cycle of movement.
That is, when the timing 80 ms (set to 80 ms at the maximum) when the first motor switch 82 changes from light shielding to light passing elapses, the accessory motor 81 is stopped from counterclockwise rotation, whereby the bridge body 80 is temporarily suspended. Stop.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, when 100 ms has elapsed from the timing when the 80 ms period ends, a bonus game effect start command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. As a result, by the control of the effect control device 300, effect information is displayed on the information display 45 and the board effect device 46 such that the bridge body 80 is inclined to the heaven inflow space 62 on the right side. By this effect, the player feels that the game ball is likely to flow into the heaven inflow space 62, and therefore, it is possible to enjoy a hot game.
In the case where the liquid crystal information display device 451 is installed instead of the information display 45, the effect control device 300 controls based on the character item production start command, such as "It is hot when winning now!" An effect of displaying a message may be performed.

The stop period of the bridge body 80 here is 160 ms, and when 160 ms elapses, the accessory motor 81 starts clockwise rotation from the stop state. At this time, the first motor switch 82 switches from passing light to blocking light in response to the start of the clockwise rotation of the accessory motor 81 from the stop state. Then, when 240 ms elapses from the timing when the accessory motor 81 starts the clockwise rotation, the first motor switch 82 switches from light shielding to light transmission and enters a waiting state. Further, the bridge body 80 starts an operation of tilting to the right from the stopped state, and is in the middle of tilting to the right. When the bridge body 80 is in the right inclination, the game balls can easily flow into the heaven inflow space 62.
When 80 ms (set to 80 ms at the maximum) elapses from the timing when the first motor switch 82 changes from light shielding to light passing during right inclination, the accessory motor 81 stops rotating clockwise and stops. As a result, the bridge body 80 is stopped from being inclined to the right.

Next, when 1600 ms elapses from the timing when the feature effect start command is sent to the effect control device 300, the game effect end command is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. As a result, under the control of the effect control device 300, the information display device 45 ends the state in which the effect display is such that the bridge body 80 is inclined to the heaven inflow space 62 on the right side. By the end of this effect, the player will know that the game ball is ready to flow into the heaven inflow space 62.
In addition, by transmitting the feature effect end command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 can understand the progress of the special view variation game of the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100. There is an advantage that the effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game is easy to be performed on the frame side.
The above-mentioned 1600 ms is constant even if there is a delay in the operation of the accessory motor 81 due to a ball biting error or the like, and the command transmission interval is constant.

In addition, when 160 ms has elapsed from the timing when the 80 ms period ends, the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate counterclockwise from the stop state. At this time, the first motor switch 82 switches from passing light to blocking light in response to the fact that the accessory motor 81 starts rotating counterclockwise from the stop state. Further, the bridge body 80 starts an operation of tilting to the left from the stopped state, starts tilting to the left, and eventually becomes to the left. When the bridge body 80 is in the left-tilting direction, the gaming ball is likely to flow into the hell inflow space 63.
Then, when 240 ms has elapsed from the timing when the accessory motor 81 starts to rotate counterclockwise (the start timing to the left), one cycle has just passed.
That is, one cycle of movement (operation) is performed until the bridge body 80 returns to the left inclination state again from the left inclination state.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 72, the operation of one cycle until the bridge body 80 returns to the left inclination state from the left inclination state is performed repeatedly. In this case, the time of one cycle is set to, for example, 4000 ms as a set value. However, for a while after the start timing of one cycle, as shown in FIG. 72, the first motor switch 82 is in a state of waiting for a change from light shielding to light transmission. There are some differences.
Thus, based on the set values of the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73, the first character object device 51 repeatedly performs one cycle of operation as shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 73 shows one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables, in which, for example, the time setting of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66, the fluctuation winning device 35 is performed. Patterns, such as the distribution rate of the once-opened pattern and the twice-opened pattern of the movable members 43a and 43b, are set in advance.
Further, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73 arranges two of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66 as a guiding device, and when the game ball flows into the fluctuation winning device 35, the first character After passing through the device 51, if it flows into the heaven inflow space 62, it will reach the heaven character device 66, and if it fits into the V prize recess 68a, 68b, it corresponds to the configuration that becomes a big hit.
Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 73 is an example in which the cycle of the first character apparatus 51 is divided into eight and the cycle of the heavenly character apparatus 66 is divided into four.
More specifically, data is set as follows.
(A) Time setting of role 1 (first role device 51): period and time (ms) set The period is 1/8 to the minimum unit, 1/8 to 8/8, multiples of 1/8 The first round is divided into eight and the cycle is set by division, and the second cycle is also divided into four to 4/8 and the cycle is set. However, no time is set for the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second cycle. This is to differentiate the reach and non-reach fluctuation time values, and this part is not used.
On the other hand, the time is also set by dividing the first round into eight, for example, in the period 1/8, the time 800 ms, in the period 2/8, the time 1000 ms,..., The period 8/8 (that is, 1) In the cycle), the time is set to 4000 ms. Also, the second cycle is similarly divided into four up to 4/8 and the cycle is set, but as described above, the time is set for the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second cycle. Absent.

(B) Time setting of the character 2 (heaven character device 66): period and time (ms) are set The period is a unit of 1/4 as the minimum unit, 1/4 to 4/4 in multiples of 1/4 In the period 1/8 of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51), it is set in a form to be subdivided into four. The time is also set in the form of subdividing the period 1/8 of the accessory 1 (first role device 51) into four, and the time is 300 ms to 1200 ms, with the minimum unit of 300 ms. It is set in the category.
And the cycle and time setting in the four divisions as described above correspond to each of the eight divisions of the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51), that is, in the accessory 1 (first accessory device 51) The setting of the time / period of four divisions of the prize 2 (heaven character device 66) is performed corresponding to each of the eight divided periods. Note that the values of the time and period of the four divisions of the character 2 (heaven character device 66) are the same in each of the eight divisions of the character 1 (first character device 51).
In addition, the second cycle is divided into four sections only in the sections 3/8 and 4/8, and the cycle is set. However, no time is set for the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second cycle. This is to differentiate the reach and non-reach fluctuation time values, and this part is not used.
Here, the reach is to perform the fluctuation of the special figure longer than the fluctuation of the non-reach, and the meaning is slightly different from the reach in one type of game machine. In this embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the special figure becomes the reach fluctuation which is longer, the possibility of opening twice becomes high (in the case of the short fluctuation time which is non-reach, it is only opening once).

(C) Total fluctuation time value (ms): fluctuation pattern time of special figure This is the operation time of character 1 (first character apparatus 51) and the operation time of It is a total value, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern time of the special drawing of the special drawing.
That is, the total value of the operation time of the item 1 (first item apparatus 51) and the operation time of the item 2 (heaven item apparatus 66) is from a minimum of 800 ms to a maximum of 5200 ms in one cycle.
Moreover, although it is 5800 ms to 7200 ms in 2 periods, as mentioned above, time is not set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the 2nd period. This is to differentiate the reach and non-reach fluctuation time values, and this part is not used.

(D) Distribution (%):
This is because when the game ball is won in the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 33a, 33b or the second starting winning opening 34), the result of the variable display of the special view 1 or the special view 2 in the collective display device 50 It becomes a small hit, the movable members 43a and 43b in the variable winning device 35 (big winning opening) perform the operation of opening once or opening twice, but in that case the ratio of being divided into the operation of opening once or opening twice What is shown is distribution (%). It can be said that it is a distribution ratio or a distribution ratio (%).
In the case of special design symbols such that the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, the distribution is 97% overall, and in the case of special symbols such that the opening is twice, 3% overall. It becomes distribution. And, in the case of a special symbol such that the movable members 43a and 43b are opened once, the period 1/8, 2/8, 5/8, 6/8, and so on of the prize 1 (first feature device 51) Distribution is set to 12.89% in the sections 7/8 and 8/8, but distribution is set to 7.50% and 9.80% in the sections 3/8 and 4/8, respectively. It is done.
This means that the operation of the accessory 1 (first character object device 51) may extend even in the second cycle in the period 3/8 and 4/8, in which case the value of the second cycle is also added. Since the values of distribution are set for the whole of the first and second weeks, they are lower than those of the other segments. Therefore, the sections 3/8 and 4/8 of the second cycle have values lower than those of the other sections, similarly to the values of the same cycle section of the second cycle.

(E) Occurrence rate (%):
This is because, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 33a, 33b, all the results of the fluctuation display of the special view 1 in the collective display device 50 become small hits, and the movable member 43a in the fluctuation winning device 35 (big winning opening) 43b performs the operation of opening once or opening twice, but the appearance ratio (%) indicates the appearance ratio of the symbol of the single opening and the symbol of the double opening in that case. In addition, when a game ball wins to the 2nd starting winning opening 34, it is all opening twice, and the appearance ratio of the symbol of opening twice will be 100%.
In addition, during the second cycle, the operation of character 1 (first character device 51) and character 2 (heaven character device 66) may be extended even in the second period, in the sections 3/8 and 4/8 of the first period. In that case, the second cycle value is also added. The values of distribution are set for the entire first and second weeks, so that there is no large difference in the appearance rate (%) as a whole.
Moreover, the appearance rate (%) is not set in the 1/8 and 2/8 sections of the second cycle. This is to differentiate the reach and non-reach fluctuation time values, and this part is not used.
The total appearance rate (%) is obtained by multiplying the appearance rate of the symbol corresponding to the number of opening times and the appearance rate of the period for each opening, and the area X surrounded by a bold line and a bold line shown in FIG. Except for the zone Y, the values are almost the same, and there is almost no difference.
Here, the zone X shown in FIG. 73 is a section of the first cycle 3/8 and 4/8 of the first cycle in the first prize (first first prize apparatus 51) and the second prize (heavenly prize apparatus 66). It corresponds.
Also, zone Y shown in FIG. 73 corresponds to the second cycle 3/8 and 4/8 of the second cycle in the first prize (first prize apparatus 51) and the second prize (heaven figure apparatus 66). doing. As for the character 1 (first character device 51) and the character 2 (heaven character device 66), the operation may extend not only in the first cycle but also in the second cycle. The value of the second cycle is also added to the value of the first cycle, and the appearance rate (%) in the entire values of the first and second weeks is set so that there is almost no difference from other sections. There is.

(F) Addition (%):
This is the appearance rate of each of the 1st and 2nd weeks, including the 1st and 2nd week operations in the 1st item (the first item apparatus 51) and the 2nd item (the heavenly item apparatus 66). The sum of (%) is obtained, and the occurrence rate (%) is almost the same in all sections, and is set to the same value.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73, if the summation is even, it is difficult (in practice, impossible) to stop for hitting the big hit.
Here, since the positional relationship of the operation in the character 1 (first character device 51) and the character 2 (heaven character device 66) is the same, each appearance rate (%) is added.
Here, the concept that the positional relationship of the operation in the character 1 (first character device 51) and the character 2 (heaven character device 66) described above is the same has the following meaning.
That is, in this embodiment, a time (special figure fluctuation) from winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening 33a, 33b and second starting winning opening 34) to opening of the special winning opening (fluctuating winning device 35) The amount of movement of the character equipment (corresponding to the character 1 (first character equipment 51) and the character 2 (heaven character equipment 66). The same applies hereinafter) to be advanced corresponding to the time is determined. In this case, since the character apparatus moves periodically, the same position is repeated again in the case of the fluctuation time of one cycle or less and the fluctuation time of the second cycle or more.
The non-reach fluctuation time is a time within one cycle (because it is up to the 8/8 cycle), and the reach is a fluctuation time falling within the second cycle. In particular, since the amount of forward movement of the accessory device is known after the change time of the reach from the start-up winning, it is possible to derive the position of the second cycle when it is converted to the periodic movement. It is said that the position of the character object device in the first cycle at the time of non-reach fluctuation corresponding to the same position as the position of the second cycle is the same (first cycle 3/8, second cycle 3/8, etc.) It is.
Therefore, if the positional relationship of the operation in the accessory device is the same as described above, the values of zone X and zone Y shown in FIG. 73 are summed to calculate the total appearance rate (%) .

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of a type belonging to so-called feathers, the configuration of the special view fluctuation display (display by the collective display device 50) is adopted as a countermeasure against the strikeoff The time is a time obtained by equally dividing the period of the first character device 51 and the heavenly character device 66, and the operations of the first character device 51 and the heavenly character device 66 corresponding to the division cycles are equally generated. It is like that. The special drawing includes the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2.
In addition, by incorporating the reach change indication into the special figure change pattern, the pachinko game in the gaming machine of the type belonging to the feather thing is brought out with novelty to improve the game property, and the reach change indication for improving the game effect. When provided, the period of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66 is also set based on the time value of the reach variation display. Then, including the reach fluctuation indication, the time value from the start of the fluctuation of the special view to the stop appears equally to the states of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66, and It is set so as to reduce in advance the distribution of the normal fluctuation in which the reach fluctuation and the operation of the first character apparatus 51 and the heaven character apparatus 66 are at the same position.
This is the appearance ratio of the 1 character position where the reach and non-reach times at which the same character position (the operation position of the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66. The same applies hereinafter) are added. Because two are added, they are reduced in advance. It should be noted that the positional relationship between the two actors at a period smaller than 1 ie at a period of 1/8, 2/8, 5/8 to 8/8 can only be calculated because it appears only in non-reach. (That is, do not reduce in advance as described above).

More specifically, in this embodiment, the period and time of the first character object device 51 as a guidance device are divided into a plurality of periods for one period, two periods, and divided into periods smaller than one period, Similarly, with regard to the period and time of the device 66, one period and two periods are subdivided into a plurality of periods and divided into a plurality of periods smaller than one period, and the time of each subdivided period is calculated. In the fluctuation pattern of the figure, the distribution ratio (%) of the one-time opening symbol and the two-time opening symbol is substantially equal (e.g., as shown in FIG. 73, approximately “12”). .89 ") (including a portion where data of the first and second rounds are added).
As a result, also for the period combining the first character object device 51 and the heaven character object device 66 as a guidance device, the appearance rate (%) of the open pattern is shown once in the variation pattern of the special figure for each subdivided period. As shown at 73, the value is approximately "3.22" and is even.
Therefore, the timing at which the bridge main body 80 of the first character device 51 of the seesaw structure tilts (in detail, the bridge main body 80 tilts to the right, and the heaven inflow space 62 Timing when it becomes easy to flow in) and the timing of rotation of the heaven rotator 67 of the heavenly prize product device 66 (specifically, the timing when the game ball fits in the V prize recesses 68a and 68b formed in the heaven rotator 67) It is not easy to know, and it is therefore possible to make it difficult for the player to hit the occurrence of a big hit. Therefore, the player does not know the timing of how to generate a big hit and does not intentionally stop the game ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first character object device 51 as a guidance device and the heaven character object device 66 are configured in combination, the ball after the game ball has won in the variable winning device 35 The movement of the game becomes more colorful, and the interest of
In addition, the control of the character sonoy 204 for driving the bat member 53 in the first character device 51 up and down is performed, and the gaming ball rolls the bridge main body 80 of the first character device 51 and the hell inflow space 63 Because the bat member 53 is driven upward to prevent the flow into the game, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the game ball to flow into the heaven flow-in space 62 while pounding. it can.
As described above, in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with the variable winning device 35, the interest when the game ball flows down the winning space 41 of the variable winning device 35 is improved and the stop is prevented. can do.

The background will be described.
The above-described stop is to intentionally stop the firing at a predetermined timing in order to perform a so-called strike of the big hit, and to launch the gaming ball at the timing at which the big hit can be struck. If this stopping is done, since the game is not a normal hitting manner, the sales will decrease, so it is desired to prevent that. In addition, if a big hit is made, it will be an unfair game mode with other players, so measures are desired. Even if one of them is hit, it is the provision of a game machine which is ineffective.
In the present embodiment, under the above background, there is an excellent effect of being able to prevent the setting strike.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Start winning hole,
And a variable winning device;
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The fluctuation winning device is provided with a guiding device for repeating a periodic predetermined operation and guiding a gaming ball that has won the fluctuation winning device to flow into the special winning area.
Opening control means for activating the variable winning device with the opening pattern based on the stop symbol of the special view fluctuation display game, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the special view fluctuation display game is started,
Variation time selection means for selecting as the variation time of the special view variation display game from among a plurality of variation times set in advance based on the actuation time in which the guidance device operates from the reference position to the predetermined actuation position;
A game machine characterized by comprising.
Here, the first character device 51 and the heaven character device 66 constitute a guiding device, and the game control device 100 constitutes an opening control means, a fluctuation time selection means, and a special figure fluctuation control means. Further, the ROM 171B constitutes a fluctuation time storage means. Furthermore, the first start winning opening 33a, 33b and the second starting winning opening 34 correspond to the start winning opening. The fluctuation winning device 35 corresponds to a fluctuation winning device, and the special winning area 69 corresponds to a special winning area.

In addition, the invention concept of the above configuration in the case of being limited to the single-type gaming machine is represented as follows.
It is possible to convert into a first state which is disadvantageous to the player and a second state which is advantageous to the player, and the winning space in which the gaming ball accepted by the conversion to the second state flows down and the winning space. The game area is provided with a variable winning device having a general winning area and a special winning area, into which the game balls are played,
When the game ball fired in the game area wins the start winning opening, the start game is executed to convert the variable winning device to the second state a predetermined number of times, and the game is accepted by the conversion to the second state In the gaming machine in which the special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated when the game ball flows into the special winning area,
The fluctuation winning device is provided with a guiding device for repeating a periodic predetermined operation and guiding a gaming ball that has won the fluctuation winning device to flow into the special winning area.
Opening control means for activating the variable winning device with the opening pattern based on the stop symbol of the special view fluctuation display game, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the special view fluctuation display game is started,
Variation time selection means for selecting as the variation time of the special view variation display game from among a plurality of variation times set in advance based on the actuation time in which the guidance device operates from the reference position to the predetermined actuation position;
A game machine characterized by comprising.

Next, the inventive concept of the fluctuation pattern assignment table as shown in FIG. 73 is expressed as follows.
The fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game is set from an operation amount by which the induction device is operated from the reference position to a predetermined operation position, and an operation time required to operate the induction device to the predetermined operation position.
It comprises a fluctuation time storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation times for the special view fluctuation display game,
The fluctuation time storage means is
Storing the distribution value of the fluctuation time so that the distribution values of the plurality of fluctuation times become substantially equal in correspondence with the operation amount of the induction device;
The variation time selection means
A game machine characterized by selecting a fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game from among a plurality of fluctuation times stored in the fluctuation time storage means.

Next, as in the present embodiment, the inventive concept in the case where two first character apparatus 51 and two heaven character apparatus 66 are arranged as a guidance apparatus is expressed as follows.
The variable winning device is provided with a plurality of the induction devices,
The game ball sequentially passes through each of the induction devices, and guides the game ball that has won the prize so as to easily flow into the special prize area,
The operating time of one cycle of the plurality of induction devices is configured to be different,
The fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is
A game machine characterized by being set in association with time of one cycle of the plurality of induction devices.

Next, in relation to the present embodiment, the following may be mentioned as a background of a game machine (pachinko machine 1) of a type belonging to so-called feathers.
Heretofore, in a gaming machine of a type belonging to a so-called feather thing, a gaming machine in consideration of the reach of the special figure fluctuation has not been designed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when winning in any of the first start winning opening 33a, 33b, after the special view 1 of the collective display device 50 changes for a predetermined time, the result of the stop symbol A small hit occurs on the basis of the mode, and at this time, the movable members 43a and 43b in the fluctuation winning device 35 (large winning opening) perform an opening operation or an opening operation once. This is when entering a reach game in the special pattern fluctuation pattern and when a small hit occurs. Depending on the type of the stop symbol, it distinguishes once open or twice open.
As described above, the winning opening on the first start winning opening 33a, 33b, which is originally opened once (moving the movable members 43a and 43b once), is opened twice in the present embodiment (movable member 43a, 43b incorporates the opening operation twice), and incorporates a game that generates reach to the special drawing fluctuation for the double opening special drawing fluctuation display game.
Therefore, as compared with the conventional case, in the present embodiment, the double opening of the movable members 43a and 43b is adopted for winning on the first start winning openings 33a and 33b, so that the game characteristics of pachinko gaming can be improved. .
Further, a variation pattern distribution table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of presentation, the presence or absence of reach condition occurrence, etc. in the ROM 171B of the gaming microcomputer 171. Is stored, and the special view variation display game is performed based on such data, so that the pattern of the special view variation of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the type belonging to the feather is particularly prevented By including the reach fluctuation, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of the strike and the improvement of the game characteristics of the pachinko game.

The inventive concept in the case of controlling the special view variable display game as described above is expressed as follows.
The special figure fluctuation control means for controlling the special figure fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is provided,
The special figure fluctuation control means
The special pattern variation display game suggests that the opening pattern of the variation winning apparatus may be different from the normal behavior, and performs control including reach variation that performs variation longer than normal variation, and the time of the reach variation is Set based on the time of one cycle of the induction device,
The opening control means is
The fluctuating winning device is controlled by a plurality of types of opening patterns, and the occurrence rates of all the cycles are approximately equal, including the one or less cycles of the guiding device determined from the variation time of the reach variation A game machine characterized by distributing and setting the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game. .

Next, a modification of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the present embodiment, the induction device (the first character device 51, the heaven character device 66) is controlled by a motor, but the invention is not limited thereto. Good.
(2) Further, in the present embodiment, the division of the operation cycle in the guiding device (the first character device 51, the heaven character device 66) is x / 8 and x / 4 (see FIG. 73), but It is not limited. For example, it may be set appropriately according to the structure and operation content of the guiding device.
(3) Of the above embodiments of the present invention, in the configuration employing the liquid crystal information display device 451, the operation of video, audio, decoration, and character is controlled by one presentation control board, but this is an example. For example, the control may be performed by a plurality of effect control boards, or a plurality of CPUs may be mounted on the same board to share control.
By doing so, the processing speed of each CPU is reduced as the processing load on each CPU is reduced. In addition, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The gaming machine can be applied not only to the example as in the embodiment but also to a sealed ball type gaming machine, as long as it plays a game using a pachinko ball.
(2) In addition, a display device capable of displaying a special view may be provided as a game machine, and therefore, the present invention can be widely applied to general game machines provided with an image device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The liquid crystal information display device 451 is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but changes the display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7 segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper Any member that can produce effects may be used.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 front frame 5 glass frame 15 effect button 30 game board 33a, 33b 1st start winning opening 34 2nd starting winning opening 35 fluctuation winning device 41 winning space 43a, 43b movable member 45 information indicator 46 board effect device 50 collective display device 51 1st item device (induction device)
66 Heavenly Character Equipment (Induction Equipment)
69 special winning area 72 service motor 81 service motor 100 game control device (opening control means, fluctuation time selection means, special figure fluctuation control means, fluctuation time storage means)
171B ROM (variation time storage means)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device

Claims (2)

Start winning hole,
And a variable winning device;
In a gaming machine in which a special gaming state occurs when a gaming ball flows into a special winning area in the variable winning device,
The fluctuation winning device is provided with a guidance device for repeating the predetermined operation as one cycle and guiding the game balls winning the fluctuation winning device so as to easily flow into the special winning area,
When the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the open control means which operates the fluctuation winning a prize device with either of plural opening patterns which are based on the stop design of the special figure fluctuation display game When,
Among the plurality of fluctuation times set in advance as the operation time for the induction device to operate from the operation initial stop position as the reference position to any one of the plurality of predetermined operation positions, the special figure fluctuation Variation time selection means for selecting a variation time of the display game;
And a special figure variation control means for controlling the special figure variation display game ,
The special figure fluctuation control means
The control of the special view fluctuation display game is performed by any of a plurality of fluctuation modes including a normal fluctuation and a long fluctuation causing a fluctuation longer than the normal fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation is required for one cycle. Set based on time,
The long variation suggests that the stop pattern may be displayed in which the opening pattern of the variable winning device is more advantageous to the player than the normal opening pattern.
A game machine characterized by setting selection rates of the plurality of fluctuation times such that all of the plurality of predetermined operation positions occur substantially equally . The induction device includes a first induction device and a second induction device.
The plurality of change times are
A first time corresponding to a division period obtained by dividing one period of the first induction device by a first numerical value;
Using a second time corresponding to a division period obtained by dividing one period of the second induction device by a second numerical value different from the first numerical value,
It is set so that the relationship of “variation time = first time × (x) + second time × (y)” holds,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein ( x) is an integer of 1 or more and (y) is an integer of 1 or more and the second numerical value or less .

Images